NZ743257A - Compounds for the treatment of cancer and inflammatory disease - Google Patents

Abstract

Provided herein are compounds that inhibit the phosphorylation of MAPK and thus are compositions and methods for treating cancer and inflammatory disease.

Description

/068032 COMPOUNDS FOR THE TREATMENT OF CANCER AND INFLAMMATORY DISEASE This ation claims the benefit of US. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/271,185, filed December 22, 2015, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. 1. FIELD Provided herein are methods and compositions for treating cancer and inflammatory e using the compounds bed herein. 2. BACKGROUND Pathobiology Of Cancer Cancer is characterized primarily by an increase in the number of abnormal cells derived from a given normal tissue, invasion of adjacent tissues by these abnormal cells, or lymphatic or blood-bome spread of malignant cells to regional lymph nodes and to distant sites (metastasis).

Clinical data and lar biologic studies indicate that cancer is a tep process that begins with minor preneoplastic changes, which may under certain conditions progress to neoplasia. The stic lesion may evolve clonally and develop an increasing capacity for invasion, growth, metastasis, and heterogeneity, especially under conditions in which the neoplastic cells escape the host’s immune surveillance. Roitt, I., ff, J and Kale, D., Immunology, 17.1-17.12 (3rd ed., Mosby, St. Louis, Mo, 1993).

There is an enormous variety of cancers which are described in detail in the medical literature. Examples e cancer of the lung, colon, rectum, pancreatic, prostate, breast, brain, and intestine. The incidence of cancer ues to climb as the general population ages, as new s develop, and as susceptible populations grow. A tremendous demand therefore exists for new methods and compositions that can be used to treat patients with cancer.

Solid Tumors Over 85% of human cancers are solid tumors, including carcinomas, sarcomas and lymphomas. Jain, el a]. Int JPharm Pharm Sci, 201 1, Vol 3, Suppl 5, 45-51. Solid tumors are abnormal masses of tissue that may, but usually do not contain cysts or liquid areas. Solid tumors may be benign (not cancer), or malignant (cancer). Different types of solid tumors are named for the type of cells that form them. Examples of types solid tumors include, but are not limited to malignant melanoma, adrenal carcinoma, breast oma, renal cell cancer, carcinoma of the as, non small-cell lung carcinoma ) and carcinoma of unknown primary.

The iveness of cancer therapy in solid tumors s on adequate ry of the therapeutic agent to tumor cells. Inadequate delivery would result in residual tumor cells, which in turn would lead to th of tumors and possibly development of resistant cells. In addition, the long-standing problem of chemotherapy is the lack of tumor-specific treatments. Cancer chemotherapeutic agents are often administered systemically. Following a systemic administration, drug delivery to cells in solid tumors involves three processes, 1'.e., transport within a vessel (e. g., blood circulation), transport across vasculature walls into surrounding tissues, and transport through interstitial space within a tumor. These ses are determined by the physicochemical properties of a drug or le (e.g., molecular or particle size, diffusivity, drug binding to cellular macromolecules) and the biologic properties of a tumor (e.g, tumor vasculature, extracellular matrix components, interstitial fluid pressure (IFP), tumor cell density, tissue structure and composition). Cancer drug delivery is no longer simply wrapping the drug in new formulations for ent routes of delivery. Nanotechnology, polymer chemistry and electronic ering technologies are being brought for developing novel methods of drug delivery. Various stages of tumor development can be explained as follows: a) Tumor evolution commences when a cell within a normal population sustains a genetic mutation that expands its cy to proliferate when it would normally rest. b) Genetically altered cells and their offspring continue to appear normal, but they reproduce excessively and lead to a condition termed to as hyperplasia. After some time (months or years) one in a million of these cells sustain additional mutation with subsequent loss of control of cell growth. c) The ing of these cells not only proliferate excessively but also appear al in shape and in orientation. The tissue is now said to exhibit a condition termed to as dysplasia.

After some time, a further mutation that alters cell behavior results. d) The influenced and genetically altered cells turn still more abnormal in growth and appearance. If the tumor mass does not invade through any boundaries between tissues, it is termed as an in silu tumor. This tumor may stay contained indefinitely, however, some cells may acquire additional mutations. e) A malignant or invasive tumor s if the genetic changes allow the tumor mass to initiate invading underlying tissue and to cast off cells into the blood or lymph. The defector cells may install new tumors loci (metastases) throughout the body.

Metastases represent the end ts of a multistep cell—biological process termed the invasion-metastasis cascade, which involves dissemination of cancer cells to anatomically distant organ sites and their subsequent adaptation to foreign tissue nvironments. Each of these events is driven by the acquisition of genetic and/or epigenetic alterations within tumor cells and the co-option of nonneoplastic stromal cells, which together endow incipient atic cells with traits needed to generate macroscopic ases. Volastyan, S., et al., Cell, 2011, vol. 147, 275- 292.

Whereas surgical resection and adjuvant therapy can cure onfined primary tumors, metastatic disease is largely incurable because of its ic nature and the ance of disseminated tumor cells to existing therapeutic agents. This ns why > 90% of mortality from cancer is attributable to metastases, not the y tumors from which these malignant lesions arise.

Carcinomas are a type of cancer that develops from epithelial cells. Specifically, a carcinoma is a cancer that begins in a tissue that lines the inner or outer surfaces of the body, and that generally arises from cells originating in the endodermal or ectodermal germ layer during embryogenesis. The term carcinoma has also come to encompass malignant tumors composed of transformed cells whose origin or developmental lineage is unknown (see cancer of unknown primary origin (CUP)), but that possess certain specific molecular, cellular, and histological characteristics typical of epithelial cells. This may include the production of one or more forms of ratin or other intermediate filaments, intercellular bridge structures, keratin pearls, and/or tissue architectural motifs such as stratification or pseudo-stratification. Common malignancies, such as , colon, and lung cancer, are almost always carcinoma. Other types of carcinomas include squamous-cell carcinomas (oral cancers), lung cancers, breast l) carcinoma, prostate (adenocarcinoma), colon and rectum (adenocarcinoma or squamous cell carcinoma), pancreatic (adenocarcinoma), ovarian, hepatocellular and renal cell carcinoma.

A sarcoma is a cancer that arises from transformed cells of mesenchymal origin. Thus, malignant tumors made of lous bone, cartilage, fat, muscle, vascular, or hematopoietic s are, by definition, considered sarcomas. Sarcomas occur much less frequently in humans than carcinomas. Types of sarcomas include, for example, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, rcoma, and osarcoma.

Lymphoma refers to cancers that originate in the lymphatic system. Lymphoma is characterized by malignant sms of lymphocytes—B lymphocytes and T lymphocytes (i.e., B— cells and T-cells). Lymphoma generally starts in lymph nodes or collections of lymphatic tissue in organs including, but not limited to, the stomach or ines. ma may e the marrow and the blood in some cases. Lymphoma may spread from one site to other parts of the body.

Such lymphomas include, but are not limited to, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma, cutaneous B-cell lymphoma, activated B—cell lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma ), mantle cell lymphoma (MCL), follicular center lymphoma, transformed lymphoma, lymphocytic lymphoma of intermediate differentiation, intermediate lymphocytic ma (ILL), diffuse poorly differentiated lymphocytic lymphoma (PDL), centrocytic lymphoma, diffuse small-cleaved cell lymphoma (DSCCL), peripheral T-cell mas (PTCL), cutaneous T-Cell lymphoma and mantle zone lymphoma and low grade follicular lymphoma.

Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NI-1L) is the fifth most common cancer for both men and women in the United States, with an estimated 63,190 new cases and 18,660 deaths in 2007. Jemal A, et al., CA CancerJ Clin 2007, 43-66. The probability of developing NHL increases with age and the incidence ofNHL in the elderly has been steadily increasing in the past decade, causing concern with the aging trend of the US population. Id. Clarke C A, et al., Cancer 2002, 94(7):2015- 2023.

Diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL) accounts for approximately one third of non- n’s lymphomas. While some DLBCL patients are cured with traditional chemotherapy, the remainder die from the disease. Anticancer drugs cause rapid and persistent depletion of lymphocytes, possibly by direct apoptosis induction in mature T and B cells. See K. Stahnke. et al., Blood 2001, 6-3073. Absolute lymphocyte count (ALC) has been shown to be a prognostic factor in follicular non Hodgkin's lymphoma and recent results have suggested that ALC at diagnosis is an important prognostic factor in diffuse large B—cell lymphoma. See D. Kim et al., Journal ofClinical Oncology, 2007 ASCO Annual g Proceedings Part I. Vol 25, No. 18S (June 20 Supplement), 2007: 8082. logical Cancers Leukemia refers to malignant neoplasms of the blood-forming tissues. Various forms of leukemias are described, for example, in US. patent no. 862 and US. provisional patent application no. 60/3 80,842, filed May 17, 2002, the entireties of which are incorporated herein by reference. Although viruses reportedly cause several forms of leukemia in animals, causes of leukemia in humans are to a large extent n. The Merck Manual, 944—952 (17th ed. 1999).

Transformation to malignancy typically occurs in a single cell h two or more steps with subsequent proliferation and clonal expansion. In some leukemias, specific chromosomal translocations have been identified with consistent leukemic cell morphology and l clinical features (e. g., translocations of 9 and 22 in chronic myelocytic leukemia, and of 15 and 17 in acute promyelocytic leukemia). Acute leukemias are predominantly undifferentiated cell populations and chronic leukemias more mature cell forms.

Acute leukemias are divided into lymphoblastic (ALL) and non-lymphoblastic (ANLL) types. The Merck Manual, 946-949 (17th ed. 1999). They may be r subdivided by their morphologic and cytochemical appearance according to the French—American-British (FAB) classification or according to their type and degree of differentiation. The use of specific B— and T— cell and myeloid-antigen monoclonal dies are most helpful for classification. ALL is predominantly a childhood disease which is established by tory findings and bone marrow examination. ANLL, also known as acute myelogenous leukemia or acute myeloblastic leukemia (AML), occurs at all ages and is the more common acute leukemia among adults; it is the form usually associated with irradiation as a causative agent.

Chronic ias are described as being lymphocytic (CLL) or myelocytic (CML).

The Merck Manual, 949-952 (17th ed. 1999). CLL is characterized by the appearance of mature lymphocytes in blood, bone , and lymphoid organs. The hallmark of CLL is sustained, absolute lymphocytosis (> 5,000/uL) and an increase of lymphocytes in the bone marrow. Most CLL patients also have clonal expansion of lymphocytes with B-cell teristics. CLL is a disease of middle or old age. In CML, the characteristic feature is the inance of granulocytic cells of all stages of differentiation in blood, bone marrow, liver, spleen, and other organs. In the symptomatic t at diagnosis, the total white blood cell (WBC) count is usually about 200,000/uL, but may reach 1,000,000/uL. CIVIL is relatively easy to se because of the presence of the Philadelphia chromosome.

In addition to the acute and chronic categorization, neoplasms are also rized based upon the cells giving rise to such disorder into precursor or peripheral. Precursor neoplasms e ALLs and lymphoblastic lymphomas and occur in lymphocytes before they have differentiated into either a T- or B cell. Peripheral neoplasms are those that occur in lymphocytes that have differentiated into either T- or B-cells. Such eral sms include, but are not limited to, B-cell CLL, B-cell prolymphocytic leukemia, lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, extranodal al zone B-cell lymphoma of mucosa associated lymphoid tissue, nodal marginal zone lymphoma, splenic marginal zone lymphoma, hairy cell leukemia, plasmacytoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma and Burkitt lymphoma. In over 95 percent of CLL cases, the clonal expansion is of a B cell lineage. See Cancer: Principles & Practice of Oncology (3rd Edition) (1989) (pp. 1843 1847). In less than 5 percent of CLL cases, the tumor cells have a T-cell phenotype. Notwithstanding these classifications, however, the pathological impairment of normal hematopoiesis is the rk of all leukemias. le myeloma (MIVI) is a cancer of plasma cells in the bone marrow. Normally, plasma cells produce antibodies and play a key role in immune function. However, uncontrolled growth of these cells leads to bone pain and fractures, anemia, infections, and other complications.

Multiple myeloma is the second most common hematological malignancy, although the exact causes of multiple myeloma remain unknown. Multiple myeloma causes high levels of proteins in the blood, urine, and organs, including but not d to M-protein and other immunoglobulins (antibodies), n, and beta—Z-microglobulin. M—protein, short for monoclonal protein, also known as paraprotein, is a particularly abnormal n produced by the myeloma plasma cells and can be found in the blood or urine of almost all patients with multiple myeloma.

The incidence of cancer continues to climb as the general population ages, as new cancers develop, and as susceptible populations grow. A tremendous demand ore exists for new methods, treatments and compositions that can be used to treat patients with cancer.

The role of mitogen-activated n kinase (MAPK), such as 2 (ERKl/Z), signaling in the development of cancer has been studied extensively. The “MAPK pathway,” or the RAS-RAF-MEK-MAPK/ERK pathway, involves signaling and phosphorylation that plays a key role in regulation of cell growth differentiation, proliferation, apoptosis and ion ons.

MAPKs play an important role in the transmission of extracellular signals into intracellular responses. Activation ofMAPK results from a three-kinase cascade consisting of a MAPK kinase 2016/068032 kinase (MAPK3)(e.g., Raf, MLK, TAK) which phosphorylates and activates a MAPK kinase (e.g., MEK), which then phosphorylates and increases the activity of one or more MAPKs (e.g., ERK1/2). MAPK3s are regulated by growth factor dependent Ras proteins. Activated MAPKs phosphorylate various intracellular targets. Dhillon, el al., 2007, Oncogene, vol. 26, 290.

Dysregulation or abnormal activation of the MAPK y has been implicated in human cancers. Therefore, inhibitors targeting the MAPK pathway have been the subject of intense study in recent years. Santarpia, el al., 2012, Expert Opin. Ther. Targets, vol. 16(1), 103- 119); Zaganj or, et al., 2011, Tocris s, no. 35 (available at htt3:f/vv'ww.komabiotech.cola," (if/ma k signaling review. dt).

It has also been shown that mutations in genes encoding receptors (e.g., EGFR) and signal transducers (e.g, RAS) upstream of MAPK, as well as downstream kinases (e.g., BRAF) are implicated in human cancers. Burotto, el 01]., 2014, Cancer, 456. Thus, the MAPK pathway ts a l target for anticancer drug development.

Methods Of ng Cancer Current cancer therapy may involve surgery, chemotherapy, hormonal therapy and/or radiation ent to eradicate stic cells in a patient (see, for example, Stockdale, 1998, ne, vol. 3, Rubenstein and Federman, eds, Chapter 12, Section IV). Recently, cancer therapy could also involve biological therapy or immunotherapy. All of these approaches may pose significant drawbacks for the t. Surgery, for example, may be contraindicated due to the health of a patient or may be unacceptable to the patient. Additionally, surgery may not tely remove neoplastic tissue. Radiation therapy is only effective when the neoplastic tissue exhibits a higher sensitivity to radiation than normal tissue. Radiation therapy can also often elicit serious side effects. Hormonal therapy is rarely given as a single agent. Although hormonal therapy can be effective, it is often used to prevent or delay recurrence of cancer after other treatments have removed the majority of cancer cells. Certain biological and other therapies are limited in number and may produce side effects such as rashes or swellings, flu-like symptoms, including fever, chills and e, digestive tract problems or allergic reactions.

With respect to chemotherapy, there are a y of chemotherapeutic agents available for treatment of cancer. A number of cancer chemotherapeutics act by inhibiting DNA synthesis, either directly or indirectly by inhibiting the biosynthesis of deoxyribonucleotide triphosphate precursors, to prevent DNA replication and concomitant cell division, Gilman et al., Goodman and Gilman’s: The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, Tenth Ed. w Hill, New York). e availability of a variety of chemotherapeutic agents, chemotherapy has many drawbacks. Stockdale, Medicine, vol. 3, Rubenstein and Federman, eds, ch. 12, sect. 10, 1998.

Almost all chemotherapeutic agents are toxic, and chemotherapy causes significant and often dangerous side effects including severe nausea, bone marrow depression, and immunosuppression.

While targeted therapy with chemotherapeutic agents, in ular small molecules, may address some of these issues, they are not a panacea and do not resolve all such . See, e.g., htt 3:f/www.cancer,org/tieatment/treatmentsandsideeffects/treatn‘ientt ' (as/tar Ietedthera av/targetet1~ therapywtoc. Additionally, even with administration of combinations of chemotherapeutic , many tumor cells are resistant or develop resistance to the chemotherapeutic agents. In fact, those cells resistant to the particular chemotherapeutic agents used in the treatment protocol often prove to be ant to other drugs, even if those agents act by different mechanism from those of the drugs used in the specific treatment. This phenomenon is referred to as rug resistance.

Because of the drug resistance, many cancers prove refractory to standard chemotherapeutic treatment protocols.

Thus, there exists a significant need for compounds, compositions and methods for treating, preventing and ng cancer.

Inflammatory Disease In on to ERK1/2, the MAPKs ERKS, c-Jun N-terminal kinases (JNKS) and p38 isoforms (p3 8d, p3 SB, p3 8y and p3 88) have been shown to be implicated in inflammatory response. Huang, et a]. 2010, Protein Cell, 1(3), 218-226. MAPKs have been shown to play important roles in embryonic development and adult tissue homeostasis, and in particular chronic ation and inflammation-associated cancer development.

INKS (also referred to as stress-activated kinases (SAPKS)) are activated by a MAPK3 cascade via MEK4 and MEK7. Manzoor, et 51]., 2012, J. Bacter. Virology, vol. 42(3), 189-195.

JNKs regulate cell proliferation and apoptosis by activating s targets, including the AP-1 transcript s. AP-1s are activated by, e.g., nes, stress, growth factors and infections, and are invoved in managing proliferation, differentiation and apoptosis.

Therefore, compounds that t MAPK3 are expected to be effective in treatment of inflammatory conditions. 3. SUMMARY Provided herein are compounds which inhibit orylation of mitogen-activated n kinases ), cellular proliferation, secretion of IL-6 and INF—0t cytokines, and methods and compositions for treating cancer and inflammatory diseases using such compounds.

In one ment, the compounds are inhibitors of MAPKl/2 phosphorylation. As discussed above, orylation of MAPKs, in particular MAPKl/Z, is known to be key in the development of many cancers and in the inflammatory response.

In one embodiment, the compounds provided herein are active in a MAPK cellular assay that measures phosphorylation inhibition and in cellular proliferation assays described herein. 4. DETAILED DESCRIPTION 4.1. DEFINITIONS To facilitate understanding of the disclosure set forth herein, a number of terms are defined below.

Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as is ly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art. All patents, applications, published applications and other publications are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In the event that there are a plurality of definitions for a term herein, those in this section prevail unless stated otherwise.

The singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural references, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.

As used herein “subject” is an animal, such as a mammal, including human, such as a patient.

As used herein, biological activity refers to the in vivo activities of a nd or physiological responses that result upon in vivo administration of a compound, composition or other mixture. Biological activity, thus, encompasses therapeutic effects and pharmacokinetic behaviour of such compounds, compositions and mixtures. Biological ties can be ed in in vitro systems designed to test for such activities.

As used herein, pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives of a compound include, but are not limited to, salts, esters, enol , enol esters, acetals, ketals, orthoesters, hemiacetals, hemiketals, acids, bases, clathrates, solvates or hydrates thereof. Such derivatives may be readily prepared by those of skill in this art using known methods for such derivatization. The compounds produced may be administered to animals or humans without ntial toxic effects and either are pharmaceutically active or are gs. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, amine salts, such as but not limited to N,N'—dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, ammonia, diethanolamine and other hydroxyalkylamines, nediamine, N- methylglucamine, procaine, ylphenethylamine, l-para—chlorobenzyl—2—pyrrolidin-l’— ylmethylbenzimidazole, diethylamine and other mines, piperazine and tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane; alkali metal salts, such as but not limited to lithium, potassium and sodium; alkali earth metal salts, such as but not limited to barium, calcium and magnesium, transition metal salts, such as but not limited to zinc; and inorganic salts, such as but not d to, sodium hydrogen phosphate and disodium phosphate; and also including, but not limited to, salts of mineral acids, such as but not limited to hydrochlorides and sulfates; and salts of organic acids, such as but not limited to acetates, lactates, s, tartrates, citrates, ates, succinates, butyrates, valerates, mesylates, and fumarates. ceutically acceptable esters include, but are not limited to, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, and cycloalkyl esters of acidic groups, including, but not limited to, carboxylic acids, phosphoric acids, phosphinic acids, sulfonic acids, sulfinic acids and boronic acids. Pharmaceutically acceptable enol ethers include, but are not limited to, derivatives of formula C=C(OR) where R is alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl and cycloalkyl. ceutically acceptable enol esters include, but are not limited to, derivatives of formula C=C(OC(O)R) where R is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl and cycloalkyl.

Pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and hydrates are complexes of a compound with one or more solvent or water molecules, or 1 to about 100, or 1 to about 10, or one to about 2, 3 or 4, t or water molecules.

As used herein, treatment means any manner in which one or more of the symptoms of a disease or disorder are rated or otherwise ially altered. Treatment also asses any pharmaceutical use of the compositions herein, such as use for treating inflammation.

As used herein, amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disorder by administration of a particular compound or pharmaceutical composition refers to any lessening, whether permanent or temporary, lasting or transient that can be attiibuted to or associated with administration of the composition.

As used , and unless otherwise indicated, the terms “manage, )7 (C managing” and “management” encompass preventing the recurrence of the specified disease or disorder in a patient who has already suffered from the disease or disorder, and/or lengthening the time that a patient who has suffered from the disease or disorder remains in remission. The terms encompass modulating the threshold, pment and/or duration of the disease or disorder, or changing the way that a patient responds to the disease or disorder.

As used herein, the IC50 refers to an amount, concentration or dosage of a particular test compound that achieves a 50% inhibition of a maximal response in an assay that es such response.

It is to be understood that the compounds provided herein may contain chiral centers.

Such chiral centers may be of either the (R) or (S) configuration, or may be a mixture thereof.

Thus, the compounds provided herein may be enantiomerically pure, or be stereoisomeric or diastereomeiic es. As such, one of skill in the art will recognize that administration of a compound in its (R) form is equivalent, for nds that undergo epimerization in vivo, to administration of the compound in its (S) form.

As used herein, ntially pure means sufficiently homogeneous to appear free of readily detectable impurities as determined by standard methods of analysis, such as thin layer chromatography (TLC), gel ophoresis, high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and mass ometry (MS), used by those of skill in the art to assess such purity, or sufficiently pure such that further ation would not detectably alter enzymatic and biological activities of the substance. Methods for purification of the compounds to produce substantially chemically pure compounds are known to those of skill in the art. A substantially chemically pure compound may, however, be a mixture of stereoisomers. In such instances, r purification might increase the c activity of the compound. The instant disclosure is meant to include all such possible isomers, as well as, their c and optically pure forms. Optically active (+) and (-), (R)— and (S)-, or (D)— and (L)-isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or ed using conventional techniques, such as chiral reverse phase HPLC. When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds or other centers of ric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometiic isomers. Likewise, all tautomeric forms are also intended to be included.

As used herein, the nomenclature alkyl, alkoxy, carbonyl, etc. is used as is generally understood by those of skill in this art.

As used , alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl carbon chains, if not specified, n from 1 to 20 carbons, or 1 to 16 s, and are straight or branched. l carbon chains of from 2 to carbons, in certain embodiments, contain 1 to 8 double bonds, and the alkenyl carbon chains of 2 to 16 carbons, in certain embodiments, contain 1 to 5 double bonds. l carbon chains of from 2 to 20 carbons, in certain embodiments, contain 1 to 8 triple bonds, and the alkynyl carbon chains of 2 to 16 s, in certain embodiments, contain 1 to 5 triple bonds. Exemplary alkyl, alkenyl and l groups herein include, but are not limited to, , ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, tert-pentyl, isohexyl, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, yl, acetylenyl and hexynyl. As used herein, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and lower alkynyl refer to carbon chains having from about 1 or about 2 carbons up to about 6 carbons. As used herein, "alk(en)(yn)yl” refers to an alkyl group containing at least one double bond and at least one triple bond.

As used herein, "heteroalkyl" refers to a straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having, ed in the arbon chain one or more , sulfur, including S(=O) and S(=O)2 groups, or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, including -NR— and -Nl"RR- groups, where the nitrogen substituent(s) is(are) alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, S(=O)2R' or COR', where R' is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, OY or —NYY’, where Y and Y’ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl, in one embodiment having from 1 to about 20 atoms, in another embodiment having from 1 to 12 atoms in the chain.

As used herein, "cycloalkyl" refers to a saturated mono- or multicyclic ring system, in certain embodiments of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, in other embodiments of 3 to 6 carbon atoms; cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl refer to mono— or multicyclic ring systems that respectively include at least one double bond and at least one triple bond. Cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl groups may, in certain embodiments, contain 3 to 10 carbon atoms, with cycloalkenyl groups, in further embodiments, containing 4 to 7 carbon atoms and cycloalkynyl groups, in further embodiments, containing 8 to 10 carbon atoms. The ring systems of the cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and lkynyl groups may be composed of one ring or two or more rings which may be joined together in a fused, bridged or Spiro-connected fashion. "Cycloalk(en)(yn)yl" refers to a cycloalkyl group containing at least one double bond and at least one triple bond. In some embodiments, the cycloalkyl ring is unsaturated or partially saturated.

As used herein, "carbocyclic" refers to a mono- or multicyclic ring system, in which all of the atoms composing the ring are carbon atoms, such as e or cyclopropane. In some embodiments, the carbocyclic ring is unsaturated or partially saturated.

As used herein, "substituted alkyl," "substituted alkenyl," "substituted alkynyl," "substituted cycloalkyl," "substituted cycloalkenyl," and ituted cycloalkynyl" refer to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl groups, respectively, that are substituted with one or more substituents, in certain embodiments one to three or four substituents, where the substituents are as defined herein, in one embodiment selected from Q.

As used herein, "aryl" refers to ic monocyclic or multicyclic groups containing from 6 to 19 carbon atoms. Aryl groups include, but are not limited to groups such as fluorenyl, substituted fluorenyl, phenyl, tuted phenyl, naphthyl and substituted naphthyl.

As used , oaryl" refers to a monocyclic or multicyclic ic ring system, in certain embodiments, of about 5 to about 15 s where one or more, in one embodiment l to 3, of the atoms in the ring system is a heteroatom, that is, an element other than carbon, including but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. The heteroaryl group may be optionally fused to a benzene ring. Heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, olyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, N—methylpyrrolyl, quinolinyl and nolinyl.

As used , "heterocyclyl" or “heterocyclic” refers to a monocyclic or multicyclic non-aromatic ring system, in one embodiment of 3 to 10 members, in another embodiment of 4 to 7 members, in a further embodiment of 5 to 6 members, where one or more, in certain embodiments, l to 3, of the atoms in the ring system is a atom, that is, an element other than , including but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen or . In embodiments where the heteroatom(s) is(are) nitrogen, the nitrogen is ally substituted with alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, acyl, guanidino, amidino, sulfonyl or the nitrogen may be quatemized to form an ammonium group where the substituents are selected as above. In some embodiments, the heterocyclyl ring is saturated. In some embodiments, the heterocyclyl ring is unsaturated or partially saturated.

As used herein, "substituted aryl," "substituted heteroaryl" and "substituted heterocyclyl" refer to aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl groups, respectively, that are substituted with one or more substituents, in n embodiments one to three or four substituents, where the substituents are as defined herein, in one embodiment selected from Q.

As used herein, "aralkyl" or “arylalkyl” refers to an alkyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl is replaced by an aryl group.

As used herein, "heteroaralkyl" refers to an alkyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl is replaced by a heteroaryl group.

As used herein, , "halogen" or "halide" refers to F, Cl, Br or I.

As used herein, pseudohalides or pseudohalo groups are groups that behave substantially r to halides. Such compounds can be used in the same manner and treated in the same manner as halides. Pseudohalides include, but are not limited to, cyano, anate, selenocyanate, trifluoromethoxy, and azide.

As used , "haloalkyl" refers to an alkyl group in which one or more of the hydrogen atoms are ed by halogen. Such groups include, but are not limited to, chloromethyl, trifluoromethyl and l-chlorofluoroethyl.

As used herein, "haloalkoxy" refers to R0 in which R is a haloalkyl group.

As used herein, "carboxy" refers to a divalent radical, -C(O)O-.

As used herein, "aminocarbonyl" refers to -C(O)NH2.

As used herein, "alkylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(O)NHR in which R is alkyl, including lower alkyl. As used herein, "dialkylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(O)NR'R in which R' and R are independently alkyl, including lower alkyl; "carboxamide" refers to groups of formula - NR'COR in which R' and R are independently alkyl, including lower alkyl.

As used herein, "arylalkylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(O)NRR’ in which one of R and R‘ is aryl, including lower aryl, such as , and the other of R and R' is alkyl, including lower alkyl.

As used herein, "arylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(O)NHR in which R is aryl, including lower aryl, such as phenyl.

As used herein, "hydroxycarbonyl" refers to -COOH.

As used , "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to -C(O)OR in which R is alkyl, including lower alkyl.

As used herein, "aryloxycarbonyl" refers to -C(O)OR in which R is aryl, including lower aryl, such as phenyl.

As used herein, "alkoxy" and "alkylthio" refer to R0- and RS- in which R is alkyl, ing lower alkyl.

As used herein, "aryloxy" and "arylthio" refer to R0- and RS-, in which R is aryl, including lower aryl, such as phenyl.

Where the number of any given substituent is not ed (e.g., "haloalkyl"), there may be one or more substituents present. For example, "haloalkyl" may include one or more of the same or different halogens.

Where substitution is not specified (e.g., "aryl”), there may be one or more substituents t. For example, "aryl" may include a “substituted aryl” group. In some embodiments, each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituents, in one embodiment one, two, three or four substituents Q, where each Q is independently selected from (a) deuterium, cyano, halo, and nitro; (b) C1.6 alkyl, C2.6 alkenyl, C2.6 alkynyl, C3.7 cycloalkyl, C644 aryl, €7.15 aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, each of which is further optionally substituted with one or more, in one embodiment, one, two, three, or four, substituents Qa; and (c) —C(O)Ra, —C(O)0Ra, — bRC, —C(NRa)NRbRC, —0Ra, Ra, —OC(O)ORa, —OC(O)NRbRC, —OC(=NRa)NRbR°, —OS(O)Ra, —OS(O)2Ra, —OS(O)NRbRC, —OS(O)2NRbRC, —NRbRC, —NRaC(O)Rd, —NRaC(O)ORd, O)NRbRC, —NRaC(=NRd)NRbRC, —NRaS(O)Rd, —NRaS(O)2Rd, —NRaS(O)NRbR°, —NRaS(O)2NRbRC, —SRa, —S(O)Ra, —S(O)2Ra, —S(O)NRbR°, and —S(O)2NRbRC, wherein each Ra, Rb, RC, and Rd is independently (i) hydrogen or deuterium, (ii) C1-6 alkyl, CM alkenyl, CM alkynyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, €6-14 aryl, C7_15 aralkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl, each optionally substituted with one or more, in one embodiment, one, two, three, or four, substituents Qa, or (iii) Rb and Rc together with the N atom to which they are ed form heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with one or more, in one embodiment, one, two, three, or four, substituents Qa; wherein each Qa is independently selected from the group consisting of (a) deuterium, cyano, halo, and nitro; (b) C1-6 alkyl, CM alkenyl, CM alkynyl, C34 cycloalkyl, C644 aryl, C745 aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; and (c) —C(O)Re, Re, —C(O)NRng, —C(NRe)NRng, —0R€, —OC(O)R€, —OC(O)ORe, —OC(O)NRng, —OC(=NRe)NRng, Re, 2Re, NRng, —OS(O)2NRng, —NRng, —NReC(O)Rh, —NReC(O)ORf, —NReC(O)NRng, —NReC(=NRh)NRng, —NReS(O)Rh, —NReS(O)2Rh, —NReS(O)NRng, —NReS(O)2NRng, —SRe, —S(O)Re, —S(O)2Re, —S(O)NRng, and — S(O)2NRng; wherein each Re, Rf, Rg, and Rh is ndently (i) hydrogen or deuterium; (ii) CH, alkyl, CM alkenyl, C26 alkynyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, C644 aryl, C745 aralkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl; or (iii) Rf and Rg together with the N atom to which they are attached form heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, two Q substituents together with the atoms to which they are attached, may form a fused ring system.

As used herein, the abbreviations for any protective groups, amino acids and other nds, are, unless indicated otherwise, in accord with their common usage, recognized abbreviations, the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see, (1972) Biochem. 11:942-944), or the IUPAC lature of Organic Chemistry (see, Favre HA and Powell WH, Nomenclature of Organic Chemistry: IUPAC Recommendations and red Names 2013, Cambridge, UK: The Royal Society of Chemistry, 2013: Print ISBN 978854044, PDF eISBN 978-1—849739, DOI 10.1039/9781849733069; lature of c Chemistry, ns A, B, C, D, E, F, and H, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1979. Copyright 1979 IUPAC, and A Guide to IUPAC Nomenclature of Organic Compounds (Recommendations 1993), 1993, Blackwell ific publications, Copyright 1993 IUPAC).

The term “subject” refers to an , including, but not limited to, a primate (e.g., human), cow, pig, sheep, goat, horse, dog, cat, rabbit, rat, or mouse. The terms ct” and “patient” are used interchangeably herein in reference, for example, to a mammalian subject, such as a human subject, in one ment, a human.

The terms “treat,” “treating,” and “treatment” are meant to include ating or abrogating a disorder, disease, or condition, or one or more of the symptoms associated with the disorder, disease, or condition, or alleviating or eradicating the cause(s) of the disorder, disease, or condition itself.

The terms “prevent,” “preventing,” and “prevention” are meant to include a method of ng and/or precluding the onset of a disorder, disease, or condition, and/or its attendant symptoms; barring a subject from acquiring a disorder, disease, or condition; or reducing a subject’s risk of acquiring a disorder, disease, or condition.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” are meant to include the amount of a compound that, when stered, is sufficient to prevent development of, or alleviate to some extent, one or more of the symptoms of the disorder, disease, or condition being treated. The term “therapeutically effective ” also refers to the amount of a compound that is sufficient to elicit the biological or l response of a biological molecule (e.g., a protein, enzyme, RNA, or DNA), cell, tissue, system, , or human, which is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor, or clinician. A therapeutically effective amount of a compound provided herein can be administered in one dose (i. e., a single dose administration) or divided and administered over time (i. e., continuous stration or multiple sub-dose administration). Single dose administration, continuous administration, or multiple sub-dose administration can be repeated, for example, to maintain the level of the compound in a biological molecule (e.g., a protein, , RNA, or DNA), cell, tissue, system, animal, or human.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, 77 ccpharmaceutically acceptable excipient, 77 (Cphysiologically acceptable carrier,” or “physiologically acceptable excipient” refers to a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition, or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid , diluent, solvent, or encapsulating material. In one embodiment, each component is “pharmaceutically acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of a pharmaceutical formulation, and suitable for use in contact with the tissue or organ of humans and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, ic response, immunogenicity, or other ms or complications, commensurate with a reasonable t/risk ratio. See, Remington: Nae Science and ce ofPharmacy, 22nd ed.; Loyd et al., Eds, The Pharmaceutical Press, 2012, Handbook ofPharmaceutical Excipients, 7th ed.; Rowe et al., Eds, The Pharmaceutical Press, 2012; Handbook ofPharmaceutical Additives, 3rd ed; Ash and Ash Eds; Synapse Information ces, Inc., 2007; Pharmaceutical Preformulation and Formulation, 2nd ed, Gibson Ed, CRC Press LLC, 2009.

The term “about” or “approximately” means an acceptable error for a particular value as determined by one of ordinary skill in the art, which depends in part on how the value is measured or ined. In certain embodiments, the term “about” or “approximately” means within 1, 2, 3, or 4 standard deviations. In certain embodiments, the term “about” or “approximately” means within 50%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.5%, or 0.05% ofa given value or range.

The term “percent by weight” or “% by weight” refers to the weight of a specified component (e.g., an active nd or excipient) in a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) as a percentage of the total weight of the composition. Thus, the sum of the weight percentages of all the components in a ition is 100%.

The terms “active ingredient” and “active substance” refer to a compound, which is administered, alone or in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, to a t for treating, preventing, or ameliorating one or more symptoms of a ion, disorder, or disease. As used herein, e ingredient” and “active substance” may be an optically active isomer or an isotopic variant of a compound described herein.

The terms “drug,” “therapeutic agent,” and “chemotherapeutic agent” refer to a compound, or a pharmaceutical composition thereof, which is administered to a t for treating, preventing, or ameliorating one or more symptoms of a condition, disorder, or disease.

In certain embodiments, “optically active” and ”enantiomerically active” refer to a tion of molecules, which has an enantiomeric excess of no less than about 50%, no less than about 70%, no less than about 80%, no less than about 90%, no less than about 91%, no less than about 92%, no less than about 93%, no less than about 94%, no less than about 95%, no less than about 96%, no less than about 97%, no less than about 98%, no less than about 99%, no less than about 99.5%, or no less than about 99.8%. In certain ments, the compound comprises about 95% or more of one enantiomer and about 5% or less of the other enantiomer based on the total weight of the racemate in question.

In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The (+) and (-) are used to denote the optical rotation of the compound, that is, the direction in which a plane of polarized light is rotated by the optically active compound. The (-) prefix indicates that the compound is levorotatory, that is, the compound rotates the plane of polarized light to the left or counterclockwise. The (+) prefix indicates that the compound is rotatory, that is, the compound rotates the plane of polarized light to the right or clockwise. However, the sign of l rotation, (+) and (-), is not related to the absolute configuration of the molecule, R and S.

The term “isotopic variant” refers to a compound that contains an unnatural proportion of an isotope at one or more of the atoms that tute such nds. In certain embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural tions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, en (1H), deuterium (2H), tritium (3H), carbon-ll (11C), carbon- 12 (12C), carbon-l3 (13 C), carbon-l4 (14C), nitrogen—l3 (EN), nitrogen-l4 (MN), nitrogen—15 (UN), oxygen-l4 (140), oxygen-15 (150), oxygen—16 (160), oxygen-17 (170), oxygen-18 (180), fluorine-17 (17F), fluorine—18 (18F), phosphorus-31 (31F), phosphorus-32 (32F), phosphorus-33 (33F), sulfur-32 (32$), sulfur-33 (33S), sulfur-34 (34S), sulfur—35 (35$), sulfur-36 (36S), ne-35 (35c1), chlorine-36 (3601), chlorine—37 (37C1), bromine-79 (79130, bromine—81 (81130, iodine-123 (1231), iodine-125 (1251), iodine-127 (1271), iodine-129 (1291), and -131 (1311). In n embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound is in a stable form, that is, non—radioactive. In certain embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a nd contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, hydrogen (1H), deuterium (2H), carbon—12 (12C), carbon-13 (13C), nitrogen-14 (MN), en-15 (UN), oxygen-l6 (160), oxygen-l7 (170), oxygen—18 (180), fluorine-l7 (17F), phosphorus-31 , sulfur-32 (32$), sulfur—33 (33S), sulfur—34 (34S), -36 (36S), chlorine-35 (35Cl), chlorine-37 (37Cl), bromine-79 , bromine-81 (SlBr), and —127 (1271). In certain embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a nd is in an unstable form, that is, radioactive. In certain embodiments, an pic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, tritium (3H), carbon-11 (11C), carbon-l4 (14C), nitrogen-13 (UN), oxygen-14 (140), oxygen—15 (150), fluorine-18 (18F), phosphorus-32 (32P), phosphorus-33 (3313), sulfur-35 (35S), chlorine-36 (36a), iodine-123 (1231), iodine-125 (1251), iodine- 129 (1291), and iodine-131 (1311). It will be understood that, in a compound as provided herein, any hydrogen can be 2H, for example, or any carbon can be 13C, as example, or any nitrogen can be ”N, as example, and any oxygen can be 180, where le according to the judgment of one of skill.

In certain embodiments, an pic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of deuterium. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable deriviative of a compound is an isotopic variant.

The term “solvate” refers to a complex or aggregate formed by one or more molecules of a , e.g., a compound provided herein, and one or more molecules of a solvent, which present in stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, water, methanol, l, n-propanol, isopropanol, and acetic acid. In certain embodiments, the t is pharmaceutically acceptable. In one embodiment, the complex or aggregate is in a crystalline form. In another embodiment, the complex or aggregate is in a noncrystalline form. Where the solvent is water, the solvate is a hydrate. Examples of hydrates include, but are not limited to, a hemihydrate, monohydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate, tetrahydrate, and pentahydrate. 2016/068032 The phrase “an isotopic t thereof; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or ’ has the a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof same meaning as the phrase “an isotopic variant of the compound referenced therein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the nd referenced n; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an ic variant of the compound nced therein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate of the compound referenced therein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate of an isotopic variant of the compound referenced therein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate of a ceutically acceptable salt of the compound referenced therein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate of a pharmaceutically able salt of an isotopic variant of the compound nced therein or its variant or its variant.” 4.2. COMPOUNDS FOR USE IN COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS Provided herein are compounds which inhibit phosphorylation of MAPK, in particular MAPKl/Z, cellular proliferation, secretion of IL-6 and INF—0t cytokines, which are ore useful in compositions and methods of treating cancer and inflammatory diseases.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula I: 3:szX Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7; R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; ] p is 0—2, and X is o, s or NR5.

In another embodiment, the nd of Formula I is a compound of Formula Ia: ;\\ SCYRQ.

Formula Ia or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R121 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, 0R3, and NR6R7; wherein R221 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, y, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and W0 2017;112777 R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2, and X is O, s or NR5.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Ia or ceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein: R131 is selected from the group consisting of H, phenyl, pyridinyl, or from one of the following: /CH3 WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 é ZI H3C/ l | H CH3 \ N / F /\N \ ”\ / / / F N N CH3 WO 12777 8; YYY; 0::WCCQ+ 3}(E? 'j HNfibw 0* “0*, WO 12777 N o \ 0% s \ WO 12777 \N_£/ WO 12777 WO 12777 N/0 CH3 1%”| / ' \” (>2: H3O O CH3 7H3C 7 ’ é” | 3 N s \ HC\H\/ 0/}{7 \ CH3 , , WO 12777 H30 CH3 3 N o N WO 12777 2016/068032 Dng“Qo/Fi #33? WO 12777 HDQD}? \N / — ; Z° {NINAW/ F WO 12777 \N / \ / N “AK \CH37 NJ,\ H3C/ o \ H30/ 8 N ’ CH3, 0 NH2 \CH3 F F F / N CH3 F \ \ JFK 2016/068032 CH3 m H30 Y“ *H s N HN )Jl/N N \:13 \fK/O\H3C/§)\CH3 COMPM UVCKVQ? @ gmawawqfifix wo 2017;112777 H 3/ 0 — WW(lD {DO / O L711. 7 7 7 %N\©}{/ i H O N / and @/| , ; R221 is aryl or heteroaryl; and X is NH or S.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula la is: ” “\NHL/H \N/N /H Obj/[H N/N\ H O m\N/N I NH N N/ W0 12777 0 0 W0 12777 \ N \ 0 min/ N N\N o 1 / \ / \ w: \o ’ N M / ”\ H ’ N)\N / H H N o NI’N\ N N O N \N o _<N o> o HN I / \ / \ JVCE H H CI 0 W W W3 N’N N F / NH / I Nmeo N\ N\ m / I H l O / / / «MD/o |\;/N\ 0 N\ H N N H H 1 \ T WO 12777 n ‘ H N gNh—{ON 0/N\ HN / \ / \\ \ N/N H N o HN«N/NI \ \Tro NAN/LN \ / \ N’N O H N W0 12777 H | N \ [\f\ HN / IN\ H ’— S H O N n \N N’N N W0 12777 WO 12777 \IN/ /| 0 N/N H N N/LN\ /N N N \ \ W / / \NYOJWHNO ’ H o N\N O N/N\ N o \ / \ NAN/LNl/N\ A O \ / N N N \ I H H H H H \ CKOH O O N/N \ N H I H I \ N >\NH \7) \\< \< / N \ I N N/N / \ O \ wo n n N \ n Wm L n M 0%m / \N \N o N/N o o N’N \ \ \ )kukm/ H / \ \N /Ofi‘/N\©)l\m/km \N / \//O PW H o N/N H N N / \ / \ //\N / 0 WOWI WO 12777 O N/N N \ /O O N/N flNNN/LN\ \ \ / \ \ / N\ i \ H H N N N’0 H H O N/N\ \ / AN \ / N H N N l H N H Y / \ / \ o O N\N N \ N N \ I H / / W KN/ / / O \ '7/N\ /N \ I\lj/\)O‘\ IX \\/ /o N N m1O N’N N w \ \ NANI / /3 \ H H H H N\ O N O N/N HNWNNA/NHQ \0N N/N\ / \ / m”A”/ / \ N/N\ W0 12777 F JYH H N \ GE‘s/o R“ H N a” W />/Q/ \ n YW F o N\N o N\N ,_.

W0 20171112777 0 o o N/N N’N N/LN\ \ / \ NH N 0\ \ N\ / N H H N I 7/ O / o /N’L \ \ u u / ACYHY N / \ / O / N O O I \ NW 0 N/N N\ \ | N i\ \ / N N N N / / \O A’, H H o N/N N M00 \ \ I / \ WSJN/kN7 , \ W1 \N / N H \ 0 H H F F o N’N \ o \ NANW rx/I/N\ H H N A/ode/kN \N / F H H o N/N N\ o N/N \ W0 12777 @fiioxwwflo o rx/J/N\ \ / \ \ N l H / \ \ N ‘ H / N o W0 12777 N/N N JL\ / \ / N H EXmailLaw\gZFUQjN NCE/1* O NH /O N\N O o N’N N \N mI \ / l \ / Mk” \ Ail/NW F O N’N\ \ OAO \ M M / :>N\/O\)N\M/LM N \N / o N/N \ /N UCdkH/k”/ \ O N, \ ‘ \N/goQkN/k” \N/ ] In another ment, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Ib: R7 R' Formula Ib or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, n R2b is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl and heteroaryl, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are ed to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both ed, p is 0—2; and X is O or NR5.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula lb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein: R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, isopropyl, phenyl, cyclopropyl, tyl, or selected from one of the following: 3 : :; E N/N\ 0 / ,F ,and C' ; wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one, two, or three substituents each ed from halogen, and R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, n the cyclic structure is selected from one of the following: R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and methyl; and X is 0 or NH.

FIn one embodiment the compound of Formula 1b is: CI CI 399m%W@© 2016/068032 //N O N O 0 Cl N\AQN LIN] 32:O/ OilCI 03 TW:@ N/NH 0 W” W gm 62%“ no G“ or F.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula 10: WO 12777 R3°O Formula Ic or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, R3C is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4c is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, y, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, ] R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2, and ] X is 0 or NR5.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula I is a nd wherein: ] R3C is phenyl or R3c, R and R, are combined to form a a cyclic structure, as shown below wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one, two, or three substituents each selected from halogen, cyano, and methyl, R4c is selected from one of the following; MOVIE7 W0 0 %N F 7 7 H3C\O E}m \ N/ H3C\o/\/\o 3}): R and R’ are independently ed from hydrogen and methyl, or R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached; and 2016/068032 X is O or N—phenyli In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Ic is: W}MMQ Q WmQr<NI FW:MQGETTW #00 ° 00% 0W}N 0/ W100JSWC In another ment, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Id: N/N\ SR4d IX\ \f Formula Id or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R101 is ed from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl and SR4; 2016/068032 ] R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; ] R4d is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, lkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and X is o, s or NR5.

In another embodiment, the nd of Formula I is a compound of a Id wherein: R161 is selected from one of the following: KWHHQ CH3 / X” R4d is selected from one of the following: W0 2017;112777 H3C CH3 g : : \ CI or X is 0 or S.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Id is: OX” / o s /\/S 3 fliofi TlWW0 / J 0 s o CI Y / : N’N N\ SMS/LS>\NQ Of N \ N / 8% In another embodiment, the nd of Formula I is a compound of Formula Ie: 2016/068032 N/N\ R2e \ \f R483(0)p Formula Ie wherein R26 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R4e is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, , alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0-2.

] In another embodiment of Formula Ie, the compound of Formula Ie is a compound wherein: R26 is selected from the group consisting of fury], pyridinyl, phenyl, and ylmethyl, wherein phenyl is substituted with ; R46 is ed from one of the following: W0 2017;112777 H3CVO H30: 0 N R5 is hydrogen, propyl, cyclohexyl or phenyl; and p is 0—2.

] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Ie is: 3% o o /\/ / N N/NH N\ / 0 A0 Q JV CO or In one embodiment, the compound of Formula I is selected with the o that the compound is not “W02 02 \ ”N” \ \ O Q O O O O 3\ / F O / \S \S NaN/N\ N imQN/N\ N \/\S 0 0 CI $8 or Cl ] In one ment, the compound of a Ia is selected with the proviso that the compound is not \S \S N/N\ H N/N\ H \/\Sin in0 Cl $8 0 or (3| In one embodiment, the compound of Formula I is selected with the proviso that if X is NH and R1 is phenyl, then R2 is not pyridyl.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula II: R5 N Formula II or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, n R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, l, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, ] R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula II is a compound of Formula IIa: R5a\N/N>/R2a Formula IIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlais heterocyclyl or NR6R7, wherein R2a is H, aryl, or heteroaryl, R53 is alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, and R6 and R7 are ndently ed from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula IIa, the compound of Formula II is a compound wherein: Rlais amino, or as depicted below: W0 2017;112777 xi?©g do wherein R2a is H or pyridinyl; R531 is isopropyl or as ed below: 0%:0ON 0 \JSSO I/CH3 N” Growl;CH3 In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Ila is: m':¢N 0 N N/N F )§\ \N / /N\N (\N N HZN N\/ O J: /\N/\ 1'“ @Capt, p0 CWN> In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of a III: Formula III or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein RI’R2 and R8 are independently selected from the group ting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, lkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2, and X is O or S; or X is NR, n R forms a non-aromatic ring with one of the carbon atoms adjacent to the nitrogen on the five-membered ring to which it is attached.

In another embodiment of Formula 111, the nd of Formula 111 is a compound wherein R1 is phenyl or as depicted below: R2 is methyl or as depicted below: p is 0-2; and X is O, or X is NR, wherein R forms a seven-membered ring with one of the carbon atoms adjacent to the nitrogen on the five-membered ring to which it is attached.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula 111 is: N H30 \ A N 0/or H3C In another embodiment, the compound of Formula 111 is a compound of Formula IIIa: Formula IIIa or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, wherein R1a is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cyclyl, heteroaryl, 0R3, and NR6R7; wherein R2a is aryl or heteroaryl, ] wherein R821 are is H or alkyl, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached.

W0 20171'1 12777 In another embodiment of Formula IIIa, a compound of Formula IIIa is a compound ] R1sz is selected from the group consisting of pyridinyl, isoxazolyl, phenyl, benzodioxalyl, quinoxalinyl, dinonyl, aminoalkyl, benzimidazolyl, benzyl, benzofuranyl, and one of the following: wherein pyridinyl, isoxazolyl, phenyl, furanyl and benzyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from methyl, halogen, methoxy, benzodioxalyl, pyridinyl, tetrazolyl; R2a is pyridinyl, R83 is en; and ] R5 is hydrogen.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIIa is: WO 12777 S W S W N / NH \N / I N / NH \N/0 \ N \ N I I / / O S O S \ \ \ F MAN \N / N/ l HAN \N / \O \ OwwmxmNE O S\ \ 0 HN4</N| N/ / O S\ \ HM NAN l//mi\ /” N \N / x o H l/>\NH \\ N //O / mk\O S N N N l /\ \O \N n N l O o N / S/>\N2\CN>/ \ I / NH N\ l N N N ‘ l \ / In another ment of Formula IIIa, a compound of Formula IIIa is a compound wherein: R181 is selected from the group consisting of: 00229 Rzais pyridiny1; R8a is hydrogen; and R5 is hydrogen.

In one ment, the compound of Formula IIIa is: N />\NH \ N or F Formula IIIb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlb is 0R3, NR5C(O)R4 or NR6R7; sz is 0R3, aryl or heteroaryl, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, , alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are ed to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both ed; and R” and R’” are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R” and R’ ” are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula IIIb, a nd of Formula IIIb is a compound wherein: R1b is 0R3, or , ] RZ" is 0R3, or as follows: W0 12777 O or F R3 is phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from methoxy, 1,1, 1-trifluoroporpanol, and halogen ] R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; [002491118 is hydrogen; and ] R and R’ are hydrogen.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIIb is: In another embodiment, the compound of Formula 111 is a compound of Formula IIIc: Formula IIIc or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, ] wherein R1c is aryl, or aryl; 112° is SR4, NR5C(O)R4 or NR6R7; ] R’“ is H or alkyl; R4 is en, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached; and X is o or s.

In another embodiment of Formula III, a compound of Formula IIIc is a compound wherein R1c is SR4, phenyl, or pyridinyl, or thienyl; ] wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, halogen; RZC is SR4, CH28R4, or selected from the following: 2016/068032 NOW?“ H3CO N H3CO \CH3 0 X/N\/lk N O H30 0 N VmL\CH3 ch/\o H 0 8 CH3 }€\S/’ 0/ N N\N/\ and RSC is H or methyl; R4 is ed from the following: \ g HZN O\CH3 W0 2017;112777 NW(16% ~ CK% \l \2 , , ;0 U3 8 H30 8 Hsc/O and R and R’ are hydrogen; and X is 0 or S.

In r embodiment of Formula 111, a compound of Formula IIIc is a compound RIC is SR4, phenyl, or pyridinyl, or thienyl; wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, halogen; R2c is SR4, CHZSR4, or selected from the following: WO 12777 H30 0 NOW?“ H3CO N H3CO \CH3 0 X/N\/lk N O H or 8 CH3 0/ N RSC is H or ; R4 is selected from the following: 2016/068032 H3C/ F /o H3C and R and R’ are hydrogen; and X is 0 or S.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula 1110 is: WO 12777 WingI}(LO O CENK /—C/ S N 0\ H or 0/- In another embodiment, the nd of Formula 111 is a compound of Formula IIId: S \ de R’ld Formula IIId or ceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rldis alkyl, cycloalkyl, 3(0)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R“ is aryl or heteroaryl, R8d is H or alkyl, R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or —NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, and R6 and R7 are independently ed from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula IIId, a compound of Formula IIId is a compound wherein: wherein Rldis ropyl, phenyl, 4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from hydroxyl and CONH2; R2d is phenyl or as depicted below: wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 tuents each selected from methoxy, halogen, methyl, and hydroxyl; Rgd is hydrogen, methyl, or CHZCHZCOZCH3; R4 is phenyl or selected from one of the following: O \O O NH H3C CH3 H3C CH3 wherein phenyl is optionally tuted with two halogens; [002951115 is hydrogen; and R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, cyclohexyl, and R6 and R7 are combined to form a six-membered cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of a IIId, a compound of Formula IIId is a compound wherein: n Rldis cyclopropyl, phenyl, S(O)2R4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from hydroxyl and COM; R2d is phenyl or as depicted below: wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents each selected from methoxy, halogen, methyl, and hydroxyl, R8d is hydrogen, methyl, or CHzCHzCOzCHg; ] R4 is phenyl or selected from one of the following: o NH {Om\ 7 7 7 wo 2017;112777 H301 LCHS H3C N CH3 wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with two halogens; [003051115 is en; and R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, cyclohexyl, and R6 and R7 are ed to form a six-membered cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIId is: 0 OH O S \ —\ F NAN \ / o H / ”\ 1,;W] H F HN/<S/N \ s o\ dN/>\N HO OH ] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIId is: \O N F \ wD\</: I NNj/CECI QHN /SN/ F N 3 : C9813“or flQkN/Krj“N o s N ON/é \ /\\ N NH2 0 OH O S \ \ F NAN \ N / o H N S O 9 /NANJK/CEOJ H F 0dr“? N\W?3\ HO OH \ 1/ O N/\N nNiN \ N n O\ \ \Z/ S .In another embodiment, the compound of Formula 111 is a compound of Formula IIIe: N R66R7e R1 e Formula IIIe ] or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein RIe is aryl or aryl; R2e is H or alkyl, R66 and R76 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed; and X is o or s.

In another embodiment of Formula IIIe, a compound of Formula IIIe is a compound wherein: R16 is pyridinyl, phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with with one substituent selected from halogen, and ethyl; R2e is methyl or hydrogen; R66 and R76 are independently ed from hydrogen or one of the following /Z‘7:\/N o D\N \3/0 p — H30 0 / XJJCJ H30 and R66 and R76 are combined to form a dine including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed, and this piperidinyl ring is substituted with phenyl; and X is o or S.

In r embodiment of Formula IIIe, a compound of Formula IIIe is a compound wherein: 00323 Rleis myridiny1, pheny1; wherein phenyl is optionally tuted with with one substituent selected from halogen, and ethyl; R26 is methyl or hydrogen; R66 and R7e are independently selected from hydrogen or one of the following o\\3/O and R66 and R76 are combined to form a piperidine including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and this piperidinyl ring is substituted with phenyl; and X is 0 or s.

In one ment, the compound of Formula IIIe is: O N CN>\<S NNHWN F/©’< \ S H\/\ DN \ \N I N|\2 I / N\ S N/VH N\ O / \ \ l H D \ l N / N or .

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula III is a compound of Formula IIIf: O OR4f S\ sz R6fR7fN Formula IIIf or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R” is H or alkyl, R4f is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, lkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R6f and R7f are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another ment of Formula fill, a compound of Formula IIIf is a compound wherein R2f is H or methyl, R4f is methyl or ethyl; and R6f and R7f are independently selected from cyclopropyl, ethyl, or one of the following CH3 H3C o 0 In another embodiment, the compound of Formula 111 is a compound of Formula 111g: NR69R79 a IIIg or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein ng is aryl or heteroaryl; R6g and R7g are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R8g is H or alkyl.

In another embodiment of Formula IIIg, a compound of Formula IIIg is a compound wherein: ng is phenyl, or pyrimidinyl, ] wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from methoxy, halogen, or propyl; ] R6g and R7g are independently selected from hydrogen or one of the following: \ \ N / NI R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, as depicted below: O/G O/C/or OH ; and R8g is H.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIIg is: 0 ”043 /o\©\</SN])J\”J\© HO/O/O s In one embodiment, the compound of Formula 111 is ed with the proviso that the compound is not gems \O \ NY“ at»fi \ *0 or / In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIId is selected with the proviso that the compound is not \ *0 ] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula III is selected with the proviso that if X is S, then R1 is not ally substituted morpholino, thiomorpholino, piperinyl, indolyl, pyridyl, thienyl, aminophenyl, phenyl, methoxyphenyl, chloromethyl, amido, othiazolyl, piperizinyl, pyrrolidino, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, or pyrazolyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIId is selected with the proviso that R1d is not optionally substituted morpholino, thiomorpholino, piperinyl, indolyl, aminophenyl, chloromethyl, amido, imadazothiazolyl, piperizinyl, pyrrolidino, imidazolyl or lyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula III is selected with the proviso that if X is S, then R2 is not naphthyl or tetrahydronaphthyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula III is selected with the proviso that if X is O and R1 is phenyl or l, then R8 is not lino, In one embodiment, the compound of Formula III is selected with the o that if X is NH and R1 is heteroaryl, then R8 is not morpholino.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IIId is selected with the proviso that R2d is not yl or tetrahydronaphthyl.

In n embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula IV: R1 \ R8 N-—-X Formula IV or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, ] wherein RI’R2 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, (0),,R4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; ] R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or rbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2, and X is o or NR5.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is a compound of Formula IVa: R223 \ R8a RBaR7aN \ N——X Formula IVa or pharmaceutically able derivatives thereof, wherein R221 is H or alkyl, R821 is aryl or heteroaryl; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6a and R7a are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and ] X is 0 or NR5.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IVa is a nd wherein R23 is H, R8a is phenyl, pyridinyl, or as shown below l/ O HNPK wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with a halogen; R6a and R7a are independently selected from H, pyridinyl, cyclopropyl, entyl, or one of the following: CH3 ”51 X is 0 or NH, or NCH3.

] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVa is: O/Néo/\///l N\ ”/VNV NI’N/ O / \ CI 0 / NH \N MN 0 NI / I HN’N A/\E>’ \ / FW/ N / o / In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is a compound of Formula IVb: NR6bR7b R1b \ RBb a IVb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is H or alkyl, R821 is H or alkyl, R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6b and R7b are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6b and R7b are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and R and R’ are ndently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached; and X is 0 or NR5.

In another embodiment, Formula IVb is: NRGbR7b R1b \ R8b Formula IVb or ceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1b is H or alkyl, R8b is H or alkyl, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6b and R71) are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6b and R7b are combined to form a cyclic ure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R and R’ are independently selected from en and alkyl, and R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached; and X is o or NR5.

In another embodiment of Formula IVb, a compound of a IVb is a compound R1b is methyl, R81) is methyl, R6b and R7b are independently selected from hydrogen, , or one of the following: W0 2017;112777 O 0 CH3 or Ml” R and R’ are en, X is 0 or NR5; and R5 is benzyl wherein benzyl is substituted with a halogen.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVb is: O\ O O l ,N O / CK3 O / S// O// N/IAN\ N(R? In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is a compound of Formula IVc: R16 \ \ NR6°R7° N——X Formula IVc or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1C is aryl or heteroaryl; R20 is H, halo or alkyl, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6c and R7C are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6C and R7C are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and X is O or NR5.

In another embodiment of Formula IVc, a compound of Formula IVc is a compound wherein R1c is phenyl wherein phenyl is ally tuted with methyl; R2° is H or a halogen; R60 and R7C are ndently selected from cyclopropyl or one of the following: O S \ \ or ; and X is 0 or NH.

] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVc is: 0 Br 0 In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is a compound of Formula IVd: Rld \ Formula IVd or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, ] wherein Rldis OR321 or NR6dR7d; R” is H, alkyl or halo, R3d is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, R5d is aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl; R661 and R701 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6d and R701 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; RE“1 is H or alkyl.

] In another embodiment of Formula IVd, a compound of a IVd is a compound wherein Rldis CR3‘1 or NRédR7d, de is H, alkyl or halo; R361 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, R5d is aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl; R6d and R7d are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6d and R7d are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both R8‘1 is H or alkyl.

In another embodiment of Formula IVd, a compound of Formula IVd is a compound wherein R1d is 0R3d or NR6dR7d; R2d is H or Br, R3d is methyl; ] R5d is phenyl or as depicted below H3C\O wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from halogen, methyl, or methoxy; R6d and R7d are independently selected from hydrogen, pyridinylmethyl, bromophenyl, or as ed below: or R6d and R7d are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, as shown below F ' and R8d is H or cyclopropyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVd is: CI O HO 0 N / \ \ \ N N N | F / N / N / N/ \ O \ Br \ N O O 023W \/\O/\/\ l or O In another ment, the compound of Formula IV is a compound of Formula IVe: R16 \ NR69R7e Formula IVe or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R18 is aryl or heteroaryl; ] R26 is H or alkyl; R5e is H or alkyl; and R66 and R76 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R68 and R76 are ed to form a cyclic ure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula IV, a compound of Formula IVe is a compound wherein R16 is pyridinyl, R2e is H, RSe is H or methyl; and R66 and R7e are independently selected from hydrogen or the substituent as ed below: In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVe is: /N/ O H O H N\N N/NH \N \ I I \ I / NH / NH \ N/ | l N / \ In r embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is a compound of Formula IVf: o R2f Formula IVf or ceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein leis H or alkyl; RZfis aryl, heteroaryl or NRéfR7f; R5f is aryl or heteroaryl; R8f is H or alkyl; R6f and R7f are ndently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6f and R7f are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula IVf, a compound of Formula IVf is a compound wherein: ] leis H; szis selected from one of the ing: C/Vx H R5f is phenyl or pyridinyl; and R8f is H or methyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVf is: o \N\ ° HQ \ i/ 6 or O/\([)( In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is selected with the proviso that the compound is not / / S S \ \ \t \i cm\ N N N c Cir c or \ In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IVa is selected with the proviso that the compound is not or \ In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is selected with the proviso that if X is 0, then R8 is not optionally substituted lino.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IV is selected with the proviso that if X is , then R2 is not aryl.

In certain ments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula V: Formula V or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein RI’Rz, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, , S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, wherein R2 and R8 are ed to form a cyclic ure including the carbon atoms to which they are attached in the mbered ring, ] R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or rbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2, and X is o, s or NR5.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V is a compound of Formula Va: Formula Va or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R121 is H or alkyl, ] R221 is H or alkyl, R8a is aryl, heteroaryl, C(O)R4 or S(O)pR4; R981 is 0R3, NR5C(0)R4 or NR6R7; l 10 R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently ed from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula V, a compound of Formula Va is a compound wherein ] Rla is H, R2a is H, 111833 , C(O)R4 or 5(0)pR4; wherein phenyl is substituted with halogen; R93 is 0R3, NR6R7, or selected from one of the following Cg00F3 A": “l“ or , R3 is phenyl, wherein phenyl is ally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from halogen, methoxy and methyl; R4 is selected from the following: WO 12777 1K and CH3.

R6 and R7 are ndently selected from ethyl, phenyl; or biphenyl; R and R’ are H; and ] p is 2.

In another embodiment of Formula V; a compound of Formula Va is a compound wherein R1a is H; R23 is H; R821 is ; C(0)R4 or 3(0)pR4; wherein phenyl is substituted with halogen; R921 is 0R3, NR6R7; or ed from one of the following ©©OCF3 A; “l“ or ; R3 is phenyl; wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two substituents each selected from halogen; methoxy and methyl; R4 is selected from the following: WO 12777 H3C Wit/‘1‘ NAM and CH3.

R6 and R7 are ndently selected from ethyl, phenyl, or biphenyl; R and R’ are H; and p is 2.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Va is: o (/3/ \ o N F N FF>ko a] CT/USZ / / \ O/N\ O/ \\O O N/\ O \ G In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V is a compound of Formula Vb: R1 b \ R8b Formula Vb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, n R1b is H or alkyl; R2b is H or alkyl; R81) is C(0)R4 or 8(0)pR4; R9b is aryl, aryl, halo or C(O)R4; ] R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; X is 0 or NR5; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, Formula Vb is: Formula Vb or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, n R1b is H or alkyl, sz is H or alkyl, R8b is C(0)R4 or 8(0)pR4; R9b is aryl, heteroaryl, halo or , R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, l, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or —NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, ] R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, X is O, s or NR5; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula Vb, a compound of Formula Vb is a compound wherein R1b is H, halogen, or COCH3, R2b is H, halogen, or COCH3, R8b is C(O)R4, R913 is H, halogen, phenyl, or C(O)R4, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with halogen; R4 is NR6R7, R6 and R7 are independently selected from H, cyclopropyl, thienylmethyl, furanylmethyl, cyclopentyl, methyl, and benzyl; ] wherein benzyl is substituted with two y sub stituents, ] X is 0, s or NCH3; and p is 2.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Vb is: WmMm , 0 met O 0/ Br I In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V is a compound of Formula Vc: Formula Vc or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R” is H, alkyl or C(O)R4; RZC is H, alkyl or C(O)R4; ] R8c is H or alkyl, 119° is 0R3, NR5C(O)R4 or NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, and R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula Vc, a compound of Formula Vc is a compound wherein ] R” is H or ; R2° is H or C(O)R4; ] R8° is H or methyl; R9° is 0R3; R3 is selected from one of the following: 0 O “CCH3C F R4 is , and R and R’ are H.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Vc is: O ”W 00 0o00F O or In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V is a compound of Formula Vd: Formula Vd or pharmaceutically acceptable tives f, 00578 wherein R101 is H, alkYl, aWl or heteroaryl, R2d is C(O)R4; R8d is NR5C(O)R4 or N=C(R)NR6R7; R9‘1 is H, alkyl, kyl or heteroarylalkyl, wherein R1d and R9d are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atoms to which they are attached in the five-membered ring; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, loxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl, or R and R’ are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula Vd, a compound of Formula Vd is a compound wherein wherein R101 is H, methyl, or phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with methyl or halogen; R261 is C(O)R4, or as depicted below 0 CH3 R8d is phenyl or )R4, ] wherein phenyl is susbstituted with ; R9d is H, , benzodioxylphenylmethyl, and wherein R101 and R9d are combined to form a seven-membered cyclic structure including the carbon atoms to which they are attached in the five-membered ring, ] R4 is ethyl, , t-butyl, benzyl or as depicted below ”rmUN wherein benzyl is ally substituted with 1-3 substituents each selected from methoxy [005951115 is H, and R and R’ are H.

In another ment of Formula Vd, a compound of Formula Vd is a compound wherein wherein R1d is H, , or phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally tuted with methyl or halogen; R2d is C(O)R4, or as depicted below 0 CH3 R8d is phenyl or NR5C(0)R4, wherein phenyl is susbstituted with propyl; R9d is H, methyl, benzodioxylphenylmethyl, and wherein R101 and R901 are combined to form a seven-membered cyclic structure including the carbon atoms to which they are attached in the five—membered ring; R4 is ethyl, methyl, l—butyl, benzyl, p-isopropylphenyl or as depicted below NJK/o‘f: fill/\NWl CH3 0 n benzyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents each selected from methoxy R5 is H; and R and R’ are H.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Vd is: Lo 0 O / S or / > 0 Ljfilfigfl} \ °§d< \ H\/\O O\/ N” S o\ —o o— \N/ 0/ KN O \ o/\ S S | / NH / O \ or Br In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V is a compound of Formula Ve: R1e \ RBe NRSe Formula Ve or pharmaceutically able derivatives f, ] wherein R16 is H or alkyl, R29“ is C(0)R4; RSe is H or alkyl, R9e is H or alkyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, l, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R56 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; and R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula Ve, a compound of Formula Ve is a compound wherein W0 2017;112777 Rle is H; R2e is C(O)R4; ] RSe is H or alkyl; R96 is H or alkyl; R4 is selected from the following: , , R56 is methoxyethyl, propenyl, or cyclohexenylpropyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Ve is: O O / 0/ Nf O O / Nf \ \ In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V is a compound of Formula Vf: R1f \ R8f Formula Vf or pharmaceutically able derivatives thereof, wherein le is H or alkyl, R2f is 8(0)pR4; R8f is C(0)R4; R9f is aryl, H or alkyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently ed from hydrogen, alkyl, l, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0-2.

In another embodiment of Formula Vf, a compound of a Vf is a compound wherein R1f is H, R2f is 8(0)pR4; ] R8f is C(0)R4; R9f is aryl H or alkyl, WO 12777 R4 is thiomorpholinyl or as depicted below ; and p is 2.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula Vf is: O\\ /O S 0A In one embodiment, the compound of a V is selected with the proviso that the compound is not """IINH H o \ / In one embodiment, the compound of Formula V is selected with the proviso that if X is S and R9 is aryl, then neither R8 nor R2 is morpholino.

In one embodiment, the nd of Formula V is selected with the proviso that if X is S and R9 is aryl, heteroaryl, oxazolidinonyl, arylcarbonyl, then R8 is not morpholino, acyl or an ester.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula VI: Formula VI or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1’ is independently ed from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, 4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, loxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, p is 0—2; and A is a substituted or tituted 5 or 6 ed aryl, heteroaryl, carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.

In r embodiment, the compound of Formula VI is a compound of Formula VIa: Formula VIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rla’ is aryl or heteroaryl, Rga’is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, , S(O)pR4, )R4, or NR6R7; R9a’is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or rbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or , R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and ] p is 0—2.

In one embodiment of a VIa, a nd of Formula VIa is a compound wherein wherein Rlais aryl or heteroaryl, Rgais H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R9ais H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, )R4, or NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, loxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached; and ] p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIa, a compound of Formula VIa is a compound wherein Rlais pyridinyl, wherein pyridinyl is ally substituted with with one or two substituents each selected from 0R3, R3 is difluoroethyl; Rgais H, methyl, phenyl, ; R9ais H, phenyl, methyl, thienyl, ethyl, furanyl, or butyl, wherein phenyl is optionally tuted with a substituent selected from halogen or methoxy, R4 is -NR6R7; and ] R6 and R7 are independently selected from H, methyl, and ethyl.

In one embodiment, the nd of Formula VIa is: / IN \ N I I l F / \ H N WAC S l I F N / O /N /N /|N H \l H S \l H \ N S O I | I I I N / N l/ N / Cbl O \ o < 3/ | H \ N HN—\ I Cm OWCmQ % W In another ment, the compound of Formula V1 is a compound of Formula VIal: Formula VIal or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R131 is aryl, heteroaryl or NR6R7; R’”11 is H or alkyl; R9311 is H, alkyl, l, carbocyclic, halo, pseudohalo, trifluoromethyl, cyano, or C(O)NR6R7; and ] R6 and R7 are independently selected from H, methyl, and ethyl.

In another ment of Formula VIal, a compound of Formula VIal is a compound wherein R“11 is aryl, heteroaryl NR6R7, Rgt11 is H, aryl, or alkyl, ] R9311 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, halo or pseudohalo, and R6 and R7 are ndently selected from H, methyl, and ethyl.

In another embodiment of Formula VIal, a compound of Formula VIal is a compound wherein R1a1 is aryl, heteroaryl or NR6R7, R831 is H or alkyl; R9311 is alkyl, alkenyl, halo or pseudohalo, wherein the alkyl group is not CH3, and R6 and R7 are independently selected from H, methyl, and ethyl.

In another embodiment of Formula VIal, a compound of Formula VIal is a compound wherein R1311 is pyridinyl or NHz, R’“11 is H or , R931 is H or methy1.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIal is: W0 20171'1 12777 /N N S or H2N In another embodiment of Formula VIal; a compound of Formula VIal is a compound wherein 00705 R“11 is ny1, R831 is H or methyl; R9311 is fluoro; bromo; chloro or iodo.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIal is: In another embodiment of Formula VIal, a compound of a VIal is a compound wherein 00710 R“11 is 2—pyridiny1.

In another embodiment of Formula VIal; a compound of Formula VIal is a compound n R1211 is methoxypyridinyl.

] In another embodiment of Formula VIal, a compound of Formula VIal is a compound wherein 00713 R”11 is 2—PyridY1; [007141R8a11s H or Ph; R9211 is carbocyclic; halo; trifluoromethyl; cyano; or 6R7; R6 is H or alky1; and R7 is alkyl.

In another embodiment of a VIal, a compound of Formula VIal is a compound wherein 00719 R”11 is 2—PyridY1; R8211 is H or methyl; 2016/068032 R9211 is yclic, halo, trifluoromethyl, cyano, or C(O)NR6R7; [007221116 is H or alkyl, and R7 is alkyl.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V1 is a compound of Formula VIb: Formula VIb ] or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives f, wherein Rlb is aryl, heteroaryl, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; ] R8b is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R9b is H, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; or R8b and R9b are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atoms to which they are attached in the five-membered ring; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, l, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or , R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R5b is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and 13 5 p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIb, a compound of a VIb is a compound wherein R1b is pyridinyl, 8(0)pR4, NH 5‘ ] R8b is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R9b is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; wherein R8b and R913 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the carbon atoms to which they are attached in the five-membered ring, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or rbonyl, R4 is depicted below \Sgs/WNZ : R5b is hydrogen or ethyl; p is O.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIb is: o o s s | l N / | l \ N N | H H Formula VIbl or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1131 is aryl, heteroaryl, or NR6R7; ] R8b1 is H or alkyl; ] R9b1 is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, halo, pseudohalo, C(O)R4, or S(O)pR4; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound wherein R1bl is pyridyl, RSbl is H or alkyl, R9bl is tuted , heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, fluoro, chloro, iodo, C(O)R4, or S(O)pR4, wherein the heteroaryl group is not a substituted pyrazole, R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, ryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, lkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound wherein R1b1 is pyridinyl or NH; RSbl is H, R9b1 is aryl, heteroaryl, halo, heterocyclyl or C(O)R4, R4 is -NR6R7; and R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In r embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound wherein R")1 is 2-pyridy1, ] R8b1 is H or methyl; R9b1 is substituted phenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, C(O)NR6R7, wherein the heteroaryl group is not a substituted pyrazole; and R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound Rlbl is 2-pyridyl; 11""1 is H; R9b1 is substituted phenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, C(O)NR6R7, wherein the heteroaryl group is not a substituted pyrazole; and R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In r embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a nd wherein Rlbl is NHz; R8b1 is H; [0077s] R9bl is Br, W0 2017;112777 cow / r In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound wherein Rlbl is pyridinyl; ] R8b1 is H; R9b1 is Br, W0 2017;112777 \ \ M M CI N/M A; CI Q N \ oWo\ N \ N \ NI \ \ / or .

In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound n R1b1 is 2-py1idyl.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIbl is: O“ S N \ )L / / M )L/ / ~ HNAN/I H2N N / MG N 2 0 CH3 Br OCHs W0 2017;112777 OH OH S 5 N \ N \ JL / / JL / / H2N N H2N N o k/G o \\/ \QN OH OH S S N \ N \ H2N N H2N N N CH3 N CH3 0 O OH NH2 , 3 | / k / / OCH3 o HZN N /\/o\/\ N >\\OCH2CH3 N 0 ON 0 ‘CHs W0 2017;112777 s \ )L/ / k/NI / H2N N HN2 N NH N \ 0 OH OH NI \ S S N \ N\ A / / H2N N )L / )L/ / H2N N/ H2N N N OCH3 OCH3 or In one ment, the compound of Formula VIbl is: N|\ |// // \ N OH N\ S N|\S \ IN// W0 12777 0“ OH S S Nl \ NI \ / / / / \ N \ N N \ S I / N \ \ I N / / | \ N N N \ | O N N CH3 \ / o N OH 7 7 S OH I S / / N NI \ / / N o /N N CH3 I O /N NH2 NS >\\OCH20H3H OH NI \ S / NI \ \ N/ O\/\0H / I \ N/ OfOCHg N N/\/ N N O \ \\\ CH3 OH 7 7 OH OH NI \ / 'i‘ S NI \ / / / \ \ N \ N/ I / N N / N NH \N O \ \ W0 2017;112777 NI \ s NI \ \ N \ N OCH3 /N /N N N o OCH3 NI \ / / \ N In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIbl is: NI \ / \ N/ NI \ / |\ N/ ] In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a compound of Formula VIbl is a compound wherein 00788 Rlbl is PYridinY1; Rgbl is H; R9b1 is WmO %NM00MWO , w, NM Xe Wm 0 O flflvflfim %WU % O 0gF, MmO «mWUWMN %O WW0 H3 w %O ”MoWQ Q Mm0 MM\Wo 3 @Q Mm,MO/ WO 12777 WO 12777 H3CO H300 OCH3 W0 2017;112777 In another embodiment of Formula VIbl, a nd of Formula VIbl is a compound wherein Rlbl is pyridinyl; R8“ is H; [007941R9b1isHN 0 , , O, , , \ \N \ \ \ ”A \ /N ”A \ / ’7\\ O\\/N O\\/N O\\/N O O O 7 7 7 \ \ .NW‘ Jw‘“ OH )\\ O\\/N Ok/NMo O O 7 7 4N" \ N5 \ NM NH \N\\N o/\\ \N/ A» A» \\/N N_,,\{H \\/N o o 0H \N)\\NH \\/ , ,HN 7 o o O \ f“ f” f K” ” HNO HNO HN Ho weQ‘éc In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VI13 a compound of Formula VIC: N R’lc / N Formula VIC or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlcis aryl, or heteroaryl; and R may consist of 0-6 subsituents independently selected from H or alkyl.

In another embodiment of Formula VIc, a compound of Formula VIc is a compound wherein R“ is pyridinyl, and ] R is H.

In one embodiment, the nd of a VIc is: In r embodiment, the compound of Formula V1 is a compound of Formula VId: \ H N R1d \\ y T Formula VId or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rldis aryl or heteroaryl; R5d is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl; and X is CH or N.

In another embodiment of Formula VId, a compound of Formula VId is a compound wherein Rldis pyridinyl, R5d is hydrogen or phenyl, wherein phenyl is substituted with CF3, X is CH or N.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VId is: / F | N \ H HN N \\N l I \N N \ / N / \ N fl 0 / or .

In r embodiment, the compound of a VI is a compound of Formula VIe: N R19 \ N\ Formula VIe or pharmaceutically able derivatives thereof, wherein RIe is S(O)pR4, NR5C(0)R4 or NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, loxy, alkynyloxy, y, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; RSe is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both p is 0-2; and R may consist of 0-4 subsituents independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V1 is a nd of Formula VIe: N R16 \ N\ Formula VIe or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1e is S(O)pR4 or NR6R7; W0 2017;112777 N \ / / \ ”a H3C O/N JN / R4 is or ; R5e is H, methoxyethyl or CHgOCH2(CH3)CH-; R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen or as depicted below p is o; and R is H or halogen.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIe is: \ / CImN H N N N YsW/K o | @(NN S Y / N \ /\.4 or | In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VI is a compound of Formula VIf: N N R1f | \Y Formula VIf ] or pharmaceutically acceptable tives f, wherein leis aryl, or heteroaryl; and ] R2f is H, -C(O)R, -C(O)OR, -S(O)2R, -S(O)R or alkyl, wherein R is aryl, heteroaryl or alkyl.

In another embodiment of Formula VIf, a compound of Formula VIf is a compound wherein leis 2-pyridyl; and R2f is -C(O)R,-C(O)OR or SOZR, wherein R is aryl, heteroaryl or alkyl.

In r embodiment of Formula VIf, a compound of Formula VIf is a compound wherein leis 2-pyridyl; and R2f is -C(O)R, wherein R is aryl, heteroaryl or alkyl.

In another ment of Formula VIf, a compound of Formula VIf is a compound wherein leis pyridinyl; and W0 2017;112777 «nan OA/O 0\/©/OCH3 R2f is H, 3 0A/NJ“ ‘N‘N‘ I l O A/ILM!“ N O \ O o S I C)(3+13 ()2 / l \ :f{3 (j 7 7 7 7 M'M "T“ “WI“ 028 028 I N I “vvv‘ C) \ Via> JMAAA OCH3 SO CH2 3 O O O 7 7 7 7 0 ML“ .M'M GAO / 7 7 7 M!“ / In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIf is: I\ \N N ”f? E: /N 0&0 7 7 W0 12777 \ \N I N l \ l \ \ N N /N \ N N CH3 l o ‘s | OCH3 02 / 0H OS\ \ N N N/ /N \ 0M \ N N | N~N /” °*©0O G 7 7 \ N / \ N / N \ N N / N N o / \NH | \ SOchg O N/ OH \ N N N/ /N SOch3 \ O N N 7 7 N/ OH N / \ N I /N N \ \N N \ Q? I /N SOZCHg O O W0 2017;112777 0“ OH “/ N/ | | \ \ \ N N \ N I N /N OzS\/\© /N OZS\© OH \ N N N/ /N I o \ N N /N A o o 7 7 OH OH \ \ \ N N \ N N /N /N N o o \ \ N N / I I /N \ N or 0 ] In another embodiment, the compound of Formula V1 is a compound of Formula VIg: <\N N\ R19 \N | Y Formula VIg or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein ngis aryl or heteroaryl, and ng is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl.

In another embodiment of a VIg, a compound of Formula VIg is a compound wherein ngis 2-pyridyl, and ] ng is aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, CH2C(O)R, wherein R is NHZ, NHalkyl, N(alkyl)2, piperidine, OH or Oalkyl.

In another embodiment of Formula VIg, a compound of Formula VIg is a compound wherein ngis pyridinyl, and ng is hydrogen, phenyl, pyridyl or O O O 9 7 7 \N N\ N\ Aw\N\/AMF{N\/~‘w\~ \/w‘w~H\N W0 2017;112777 A» \NJG A» CN \ \NJQWN w w H o o o , 7 , OH \o N\ N\ \N \ / \ / \ / A» H\N A» 'TN A» TN OH 0 o o , , , H \ / 0/ I | \ \ N N 0 M N :15, Hg WWCLO/37,“if WC? \ I T T WWQ ‘WVU W m 0 0 o \ N T T H 3.17NorN N / 3:5 551-; N CN \NI if TWCF T T 3'»WN :51,WN 3WN CH / / I I , / \ \ N OH, N 0/, O \ N N o T 'r ’W / \ , N\/\ /\/0H 27,, N\/\ /\/0\ 0 0 \ 'N W 1r OH O I S EffigNWO/VO\ lg/Eero/VO\ %N “‘va MOHWOJAfiNHZ\ X XX 0 O O or w.O 7 7 In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula VII: R8 N R1 Formula VII or pharmaceutically able derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or rbonyl, ] R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VII is a compound of a VIIa: R8a N Rla Formula VIIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is aryl or heteroaryl, ] R221 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, , S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R83 is H or alkyl, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, loxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or ; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIIa, a compound of Formula VIIa is a compound wherein R1a is pyridinyl, R231 is selected from one of the following: WO 12777 CH3 0 \\S ”M 0 0 Cl 0 o \ o NM I N / NM H H F o F NM N H H W0 2017;112777 % O Nf00.

O / | O N? | k CH3 or CH3 ‘ and R821 is methyl.

In another embodiment of Formula VIIa, a compound of a VIIa is a compound wherein Rla is pyridinyl; R281 is selected from one of the following: WO 12777 / I 0 / N N/ l CH3 or CH3 ; and R8a is .

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIa is: N\ O \ N\ \N I K I / / \ \ Z—\ \z \ \z Z 7 :=0 Z ZI \ / oI o 0I 0 9? TI Z \ Z\ 3:22 Z ZI / / ZI 0so oI O / OH 0 (3 OH O fi/TDQo N Ho \ / N \ \ N O / \ / / OH O N/wH/IjN / N N / N H \ \N F N\ S / \ OH 0 , /, OH O OH o / N/ N/\ N N \ l \N I N \ |\ N |\ N / / In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula VIIIa or Formula VIIIb: N R1 N R1 NR5 NR6R7 Formula VIIIa Formula VIIIb or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, wherein R1’ is independently selected from the group ting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; ] each R5 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both p is 0-2; and A is a substituted or unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered aryl, aryl, carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIa is a nd of Formula VIIIalI N R181 R931 NRZa1 Formula VIIIal or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R”11 is H, aryl or heteroaryl, R2811 is H, alkyl, alkoxy or aryloxy; R8211 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; WO 12777 R9211 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, ryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, ryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5a1 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic ure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In r embodiment of Formula VIIIal, a compound of Formula VIIIal is a compound wherein R131 is H; ] 112*11 is H; R831 is phenyl, wherein phenyl is substituted with methoxy; R931 is , wherein phenyl is substituted with methoxy; [00913111Sal is depicted below: In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIal is: \“\/\/Nr O \ / / I / O O In another ment, the compound of Formula VIIIb is a compound of a VIIIbl : R9b1 NR6b1R7b1 Formula VIIIbl or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein RIbl is H, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl, R8b1 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R9b1 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, , S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, ryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; each R5 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, R6b1 and R7131 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, or R6b1 and R7b1 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIIIbl, a compound of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein R1b1 is dyl; R8b1 is H, methyl or phenyl; R9b1 is H, alkyl, l, alkynyl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, lkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, kyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, loxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, ] each R5 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R6b1 and R7b1 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6131 and R7131 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached; wherein NR6b1R7bl is not NHlVIe, NHEt, NHn-Pr, NHbenzyl or NH—2-phenethyl; and wherein NRfl’IR7bl is not morpholine when R8b1 and R9131 are both hydrogen; and p is 0-2.

In another embodiment of Formula VIIIbl, a compound of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein WO 12777 Rlbl is 2—pyridyl; R8b1 is H, R9b1 is substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, halo, C(O)NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R6b1 and R7131 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R61,1 and R7bl are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; wherein NR6b1R7bl is not NHMe, NHEt, NHn-Pr, NHCH2CH20H, NHbenzyl optionally substituted on the phenyl ring, or NH—2-phenethyl optionally substituted on the phenyl ring; and wherein NR‘I’blR7bl is not morpholine when R8b1 and R9bl are both hydrogen.

In another embodiment of Formula VIIIbl, a nd of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein R1b1 is H, methyl, or pyridinyl; [0094s] R8b1 is H or methyl; ] R9b1 is H or phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with one or two tuents selected from each R5 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6]31 and R7131 are independently selected from H, methyl, hydroxypropyl, ypropyl, hydroxyethyl, morpholinylethyl, furanylmethyl, or one of the following: W0 2017;112777 fi/ \CH W3 NH N O O OH H0 or , 7 7 00953 R6b1 and R7b1 are combined to form a cYclic structure including the nitro en atom tog which they are both attached, as ed below In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIbl is: 2016/068032 \ N\ s N / / / s HN \N HO/Vowu K‘s 7 /7 I I / lN \ N\ \ S N\ S \ N s I \ / / I Nl/ N / N / / jNH HN k 0 HO | OH / IN N N l | \ N\ S N / / \ N\ s | | N / NH N / / I HN 0N U l o ~H ,HO | wk 8 N / / /IN N / / | N / / In another embodiment of Formula VIIIbl, a compound of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein Rlbl is pyridinyl; ] Rgbl is H, methyl or phenyl; R9b1 is H, bromo or phenyl; and 1\1R"b1R7b1 is selected from o?o N(\OHNCN EN] ,qu jvfl TN] TN] (liq—1i“ 7 7 7 7 7 7 HKNA/H CH3 CH3O CH\3 N/ N N f E 3 \ I “iv“ N NH [:1 N’N “1"“ o , “f“, 7 / O C|3H3 CH3 N N \ NH NYkNH E j E j Hofki W's,“ g / N'ws 'I‘ 'l‘ N’ ' N’N ' “1"“ ”r“ 7 7 CH3\N/j/\'}l WNW\N’ N'M HN’N 7 7 7 W0 2017;112777 Q 0% [:01”Whig WNW (:3 V11AM avvm M O | 3%Y% m Gwyn”: 00 r:m 61ngg A?)Q o 7 7 7 7 7 HgCY CH O3 \/\NH /\)\ CH30\)\ H300 NH NH “I“ or mlm 7 7 7 wherein NR‘I’blR7bl is not morpholine when R8b1 and R9b1 are both hydrogen.

] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIbl is: 00 00 W0 12777 I NI \ \ NI \ \ / / \ N S \ N S \ N/ S I I I N /N /N N—< CH 4 \N ‘3 N’ N CH3\<\ NH NI \ \ NI \ \ \ N/ S \ N/ S | | /N /N /CH3 N N NH N N \ \ N \ \ I CH3 I / / \ N S \ N S /N N CH3O \ NH HN2 W0 N | NI \ \ \ N/ S \ N/ S I I /N N WO 12777 CI)H3 CH3 <NVANH N N NI \ \ NI \ \ NI \ \ \ N/ S \ N/ 3 \ N/ S I I I /N N /N [CH3 NC CH3\N \ N ,CH3 \N’ H2N /, N \ N S I \ N/ s /N /N O O 802 (N) [N] [N] N N N NI \ \ NI \ \ NI \ \ / / \ N 3 \ N 3 \ N/ S I I I N N N 2016/068032 V \II/\NH N NI \ \ NI \ \ NI \ \ / / / \ N S \ N S \ N S I | I N /N N 0WN HO OZSQ E 1 O NH N N NI \ \ Nl \ \ NI \ \ / / / \ N S N S \ N S I I I N N N °H CW E] [N] N N N NI \ \ NI \ \ NI \ \ \ N/ S \ N/ S \ N/ S I I I N /N /N N 0 o EN] N N N K/\NH NI\\ NI\\ NI\\ \ N/S I\ N/8 I\ N/3 N /N /N O HBCYO H2NJKEj N CH03 \/\NH E 1 N N NI \ \ NI \ \ NI \ \ \ N/ S \ N S \ N/ S I I N N N H2N o 65 (VS \ N N / N N \ NI \ \ NI \ \ N / / / / \ N 3 \ N 5 H300 NH I I N N \/Y 7 7 ,Or N \ \ | CH3 \ N S In another embodiment of Formula VIIIbl, a compound of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein W0 2017;112777 R“31 is nyl; R8b1 is H, methyl or phenyl; R9b1 is —C(O)NR6R7; and is selected from A» A» o o )\NH )‘NH O O O \ ri / ii / \ \ \ / N /, N /O /O OH 7 7 7 \ A» Aw %\NH )‘NH )‘N/ O O O \ \ / o \ / N / N/ N/ o , 7 , Jim» )‘NH 13): O NH )\NH O O \N \ N \N N OH N OH W0 2017;112777 4.).» \ ‘ 0%NH HN\ I CN JLN/VVO\ akT/VVO\ JOLW kw “ e, Ms< “a /s<”\ O/\Oor O/\O NR6b1R7b1 is selected from (:1 (:1 (if if) “901gOMe MeOyr“ In another embodiment of a VIIIbl, a compound of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein Rlbl is pyridinyl; ] RSbl is H; R9"1 is H; R6b1 and R7b1 are independently selected from H, / N / N / OCH //N / 3 0 o o a a “a :11, 7 7 7 7 W0 2017;112777 35WW//N //N OH NH2 \/©///N 7 ,ZEJK/o 7 o / N o / o / N ka/O | \ Ifka/O \ NagL’Jk/O I 0 /N 0 NAN o /N\|/OH 3‘5JJ\/O I \ EILIJk/ON :LLHJK/ \k/IN , 7 , th/OVYH\N :11, N/\ V 3.55 0 “fix? K 3‘11 OCHs and E In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIbl is: / N / N S S N \ N \ I I I / N N / / N / / N \ W I N / / \/N\/\rNH H3COWNH <1/NH or O 7 .

In another embodiment of Formula VIIIbl, a compound of Formula VIIIbl is a compound wherein 00974 R1b1 is PyridinYl or methoxYPYridinyl, R8b1 is H; ] R9b1 is H, bromo, chloro, cyano, romethyl or phenyl, and NR6b1R7b1 is NJ,“ ] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIbl is: W0 20171'1 12777 00 00 O IN/ S /N /N /N In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb is a compound of Formula VIIIbZi N R1 b2 R/ /N NR6b2R7b2 Formula VIIIb2 or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1b2 is H, aryl or aryl, R6bz and R7b2 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6b2and R7b2 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, p is 0—2; and R may consist of 0—6 subsituents independently ed from H or alkyl.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb is a compound wherein Rlbz is pyridinyl; R6b2 and RM are independently ed from one of the following: W0 2017;112777 N uOH , ; or R6b2 and RM are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, as depicted below: R is H.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb2 is: HzN FIN/O/Y\OO/ OH ""'""/ HN““‘ 09530953 N\ “50 “P IN |\ “/ VAMN/D / OH N/ 5iK HS:go 953 In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb is a compound of Formula Formula VIIIb3 or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, ] wherein R1b3 is H, aryl or heteroaryl, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, each R5 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R6b3 and R7b3 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6b3 and R7b3 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; ] p is 0—2; and R may consist of 0-4 subsituents independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7. 1] In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb3 is a compound wherein: R1b3 is thienyl; R6b3 and R7b3 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, as depicted below H35”0 WW H3C )\N?i¢[l1‘s‘f R is H.

] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb3 is: In another embodiment, the compound of Formula VIIIb is a compound of Formula VIIIb4: N R1b4 R8b4‘</ I Y N /N R9b4 N R6b4R7b4 Formula VIIIb4 or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1b4 is H, alkyl, aryl or aryl, R8b4is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, 4, NR5C(O)R4, or NR6R7; R9b4 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, C(O)R4, or S(O)pR4; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is en, hydroxy, alkyl, kyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, loxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; each R5 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached; R6b4 and R7134 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6b4 and R7b4 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

WO 12777 In one embodiment of Formula VIIIb4, a compound of a VIIIb4 is a compound wherein wherein R11,4 is 2—pyridy1, R8b4 is H' R9b4 is HR, wherein R is H, alkyl, aryl, arylakyl, heteroaryl; NR6b4R7b4 is a morpholine ring; and [001022 p is 0—2.

In one embodiment of Formula VIIIb4, a nd of Formula VIIIb4 is a compound wherein 001024 R1b4 is Wridiny1, R8b4 is H' R9b4 is CHZCONHR, wherein R is H, N4 N4 f NH N/ N/ N/i \ \ NH I \ \ O O O O O 0 \ \ HO or HO 7b4 is In one embodiment, the compound of formula VIIIb is selected with the proviso that if A is a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or thienyl ring, and R6 is H, then R7 is not 4-pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, chloropyridinyl or indazole.

In one embodiment, the compound of formula VIIIbl is selected with the proviso that ifR6 is H; then R7 is not 4-pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, chloropyridinyl or indazole.

In one embodiment, the compound of a VIIIb3 is selected With the proviso that ifR6 is H; then R7 is not dyl, pyrimidinyl, chloropyridinyl or indazole.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula IXa or Formula IXb: R8 N R1 R8 N 0 N N / \ R2 R2 R5 NR6R7 0 Formula IXa Formula IXb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2 and R8 are ndently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, , S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, loxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, ryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, 7] R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic ure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0-2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IXa is a compound of Formula IXal: R831 N R1 a1 R2a1 NR6a1R7a1 Formula IXal or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlal is aryl or heteroaryl, R”11 is H or alkyl, 3] R8“ is alkyl, 4] Rf”11 and R7al are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, arylamino, alkylamino, arylcarbonylamino, heteroarylcarbonylamino and alkylcarbonylamino; or R6211 and R7211 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment of Formula IXal, Rlal is aryl or heteroaryl, R”11 is H or alkyl, 7] R8“ is alkyl, R6211 and R7211 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, arylamino, alkylamino, arylcarbonylamino, heteroarylcarbonylamino and alkylcarbonylamino, or R631 and R7“?11 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed.

In one embodiment of Formula IXal, R1311 is 2-pyridyl; R”11 is H or alkyl, R8“ is alkyl, R6211 and R7al are independently selected from hydrogen, C(O)R, wherein R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl.

E \ / In one ment, Rlal is ; R2“ is H or methyl, R8211 is , ethyl, or trifluoromethyl; N 0 EN l/NVCH3 Ems/1 O ’/ CH3 E\&:Z:3H3 CH3N 0 CH3 EDE—NH CH NH )VOH 3 2 i OH (”No;or R6311 and Rm are combined to form CH3 including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached. g \ / In one embodiment ofFormula IXal, Rlalis ; R281 is H or methyl; R8“ is H; R6‘11 and R7211 are independently selected from H, / N / N / / / N o / O OCH3 0 / O W0 2017;112777 WWWW”? 1L313% aLoJ3m LO?” EEK/0Q EEK/0w 3 ayJi/OVCILOH, ) o Nib] OH akON WK/Ofl ? o /N o /N hfk/Ofimo th/OOW?” In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IXal is: IN\ \N NH / 0 / \ \_/ WO 12777 H01 F F H3C NH N|\ H3Cf§N N \ N/ NH / / O H3C N |\ N / HN N/ N 0 “CH3 W“MI:I F HN NH2 CH3 N /N O NH | CH3 \ N\ or CH3 In one embodiment, the compound of a IXal is: In another embodiment, the compound of Formula IXb is a compound of Formula IXbl: R5b1 H2N NYo R6b1R7b1N R5b1 Formula IXbl 4] or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein each R5131 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6bl and R7131 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached. woos/w In one embodiment, each RSbl is methyl or O ; R6b1 and R7b1 are ed to form a piperidine structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment, the nd of Formula IXbl is: [CH3 H3C-N\ 02820 0 IO In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IXa is selected with the proviso that if R1 is heteroaryl, then NR6R7 is not morpholino.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula IXal is ed with the proviso that if R1a is heteroaryl, then NR‘r’aR7a is not morpholino.

In one ment, the compound of Formula IXa is selected with the proviso that if R1 is morpholino, then NR6R7 is not NHZ.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and s provided herein are of Formula X: R8 N NR6R7 I \Y Formula X or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, l, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the nd of Formula X is a compound of Formula Xa: R88 N NR621R73 R1 a Formula Xa or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, wherein R1a is H or alkyl, R221 is H or halo; R8a is H or alkyl, R6a and R7a are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6a and R7a are ed to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment, R1a is H, methyl, or trifluoromethyl, R2a is H or Br; R8a is H, methyl, or trifluoromethyl, R6a and R7a are independently selected from en, CH30 {00%§_l__/FF\CH3O N I/N\n/H CHSF 0 \© Rik/\OH Cl ,or F ,or R6a and R7a CH3\N O\ §N/\:\/N \ /N kEEIj; §_N\—<b are combined to form \Nb k“ ”I I 0 including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one ment, the compound of Formula Xa is: F F N/ H3C NJ\\N | CAN N N In one embodiment, the compound of Formula X is selected with the proviso that if R1 is methyl and NR6R7 is NHz, then R8 is not aryl.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods ed herein are of Formula XI: Formula XI or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, 7] R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, lkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula X1 is a compound of Formula XIa: Formula XIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is H or alkyl, 4] R2a isC(O)R4, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, l, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5a is H, aryl or heteroaryl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic ure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment R1a is H or methyl; yLNM é/LLN/\ Rzais G or©,and R52113 Ph.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XIa is: CW N'N N/ o : ,Nig GOTN In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XII: / N \ R9 A N R8 Formula XII or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, halo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is en, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, ryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; 8] R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are ed to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XII is a compound of a XIIa: R1 a Rga /A N N/ R8a Formula XIIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is alkyl or NR6R7; R2a is H or alkyl; R8a is H or alkyl, R9a is H or R6’R7’NC(0)a1ky1; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R63 and R7, are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl and cycloalkyl, or R6, and R7) are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached. i0 0 In one embodiment, Rlais methyl, F F or , ; WO 12777 R221 is H; R8a is methyl or trifluoromethyl; and 6K/(l)LN Ark/[OJ\N R9a is H, 133,0r Ark In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XIIa is: N N / F or F.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XII is selected with the proviso that the compound is not fl 53 /—<A\);\“\N \ N \N \ .or /—</NN¢k/ In certain embodiments, the nds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XIII: R1 1 R10 / O R8 a XIII or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8, R9, R10 and R11 are independently ed from the group consisting of H, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, )R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0-2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XIII is a compound of Formula XIIIa: WO 12777 R1 1a R103 / 0 R88 Formula XIIIa or pharmaceutically able tives thereof, wherein R121 is H or alkyl; R2a is H or alkyl, R8a is H or alkyl, R9a is H or alkyl, R10a is aryl, heteroaryl or C(0)R4; R11a is H, -alkleR3 or C(O)R4; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is en, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In another embodiment, R1a is H or alkyl, R221 is H, 0R3a or alkyl; R8a is H or alkyl, R9a is H or alkyl, R10a is aryl, aryl or C(0)R4; R11a is H, -alkleR3 or C(O)R4; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment, R12‘ is H‘ R8a is H- R9a is H' N o— 0 Mb 29% 0’ Rloais W0 §—©—0\ or O ' and §\/0 0 7] R11a is H, 3/\0/\, Y or YMCA.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XIIIa is: Cémj—Wm In certain ments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XIV: R10% a XIV or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8, R9 and R10 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, lkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both p is 0—2; and X is s or NR5. [001 178] In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XIV is a compound of Formula XIVa: R1034</ Formula XIVa [001 179] or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R”, R8a and R9a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl or halo; R2a is H, alkyl, halo, C(O)R4 and 8(0)pR4; R10a is cyclyl, -alkleR6R7 or NR6R7, 3] R3 is en, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, , alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, y, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, p is 0—2, and X is s or NR5.

In one embodiment, Rla, R8a and R9a are H, 0] RZaisHor O ; O WI? N ’ Qjop E—ZO {5 | HN R10a is §_/ \ §—/ §_/ , , , , , 0}C)Q 3 9 3 7 3 )or R5 is H, methyl, n-propyl, Mo/Q/j MO::D, M01 M 3Q O W—oOQX MoO") Mob , 7 7 , uO/Q, HF fl F1 or e'K/\O ; and X is s or NR5.

In one embodiment, R”, RBa and R9a are H; §—§—N\II / R2a is H, -CO(O)Et, or O - ©—\ @0870 Ow H53o o <2 6] Rwais§_/ \ §_/ / , , , ,§—/ , I} y93 >2 .36 MO WO©_\: M0000M0 7 7 7 7 ' and X is s or NR5.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XIVa is: @1sz ©an a a O\©\ O W0 12777 N\ N/YN N\ HN U] MyCir W0 20171112777 In r embodiment, the compound of Formula XIVa is: \\ or In one embodiment, the compound of formula XIV is selected with the proviso that R10 is not morpholinomethyl, piperidinylmethyl, methylpiperizinylmethyl, morpholino-CH(CH3)—, piperidinyl-CH(CH3)—, piperizinyl-CH(CH3)-; and X is not NR5 if R5 is aryloxyalkyl or kyl.

In another embodiment, the disease to be treated with the compounds of formula XIV is not a retinal tumor.

In one embodiment, the compound of formula XIVa is selected with the proviso that R10a is not morpholinomethyl, dinylmethyl, methylpiperizinylmethyl, morpholino-CH(CH3)-, piperidinyl-CH(CH3)-, methylpiperizinyl-CH(CH3)-; and X is not NR5 if R5 is aryloxyalkyl or arylalkyl.

In another embodiment, the disease to be treated with the compounds of formula XIVa is not a retinal tumor.

In one embodiment, the nd of a XIV is selected with the proviso that the compound is not WO 12777 or \ In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XIVa is selected with the proviso that the compound is not or \ In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XVa or Formula XVb: HO Ar H CF3 H H H H N—R5 N—R5 N N R1 R1 Formula XVa Formula XVb or ceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1 is independently ed from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or ; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl or heteroarylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, p is 0—2; and Ar is aryl or heteroaryl. 6] In another ment, the compound of Formula XVa is a compound of Formula XVal: H CF3 N R53 Formula XVal or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is H, aryl or heteroaryl, and R5a is alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl or heteroarylcarbonyl.

In one embodiment, R1a is H, phenyl; and O O WH \\ ,N\/ N s, o s—<\ o In one embodiment, the nd of Formula XVal is: N O FF f0 Ln“ /N,NJJ\/o O o f0\\,N\) N S\\ /N‘N o / N o OH OH F F F F /N\NJJ\/O /N‘N o F OH F 0/ F OHF F F CHF N F CI CI 31:; N \n/\/\O o O s—QfijN F F O 0 K N “S’NV 91kO /\N “O ’N F F or In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XVb is a compound of a XVbl: H H N R5a R1 a Formula XVbl or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, wherein R1a is H, aryl or heteroaryl; R5a is alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, rbonyl or heteroarylcarbonyl; and Ar is aryl or heteroaryl.

In one embodiment, Rlaisg C ; Rsais O ‘and Arisg C .

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XVbl is: In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the itions and methods ed herein are of Formula XVI: R1 R5 R2 N R8 N R9 R Formula XVI or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, 2 l 8 R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2; each R and R’ are independently selected from H, alkyl, or cycloalkyl, and Ar is aryl or aryl.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XVI is a compound of Formula XVIa: R18 R5a RZa N R881 N R93 R Formula XVIa or pharrnaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R”, RZa, R8a and R9a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl and halo; Rsa is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, 6] R6a and R7a are ndently ed from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6a and R7a are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2; each R and R’ are independently selected from H, alkyl, or cycloalkyl, and WO 12777 Ar is aryl or heteroaryl.

In one embodiment, Rla, Rza, R8a and R9a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, and F; R5a is cyclopropyl or 9% 2] each R and R’ are H or methyl; and O\)LN/\ W E \ / Ar is or N In one embodiment, the compound of a XVIa is: V34”NLOIDVVQ,N In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XVII: R2 R10 R8 0 R12 R15 R13 Formula XVII or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8, R9, R10, R“, R12, R13, R14 and R15 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, lkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl; R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0—2. 3] In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XVII is a compound of Formula XVIIa: R28 R108 R11a R8a O R12a R15a R13a R143 Formula XVIIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R”, R”, R88, R93: R103, R128, R1“, R1421 and R1521 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R11a is NR6aR7a; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, ryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are ndently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R63 is arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, R7, is H or alkyl, and R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In one embodiment, R”, R”, R81 R93: Rwa, Rm, R1”, R14a and R15a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R11a is NR6a 7a, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, y, ryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently ed from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and 0] R6 is arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, R7 is H or alkyl, and R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed; and p is 0—2.

In one embodiment, wherein R”, R23, Rsa, R931, Rloa, Rm, Rm, R14a and RIsa are independently selected from the group consisting of H, methyl, F, trifluoromethyl, or OEt; and §\u/\« /N In one ment, the compound of Formula XVIIa is: FYawr />’N /\O000 F O‘N or 02”: In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XVII is a compound of Formula XVIIb: sz R10b R11b Rab O R12b R15b R13b R14b Formula XVIIb or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, wherein R”, Rza, Rsa, R9a, R10a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, halo, and 0R3, Rlla, Rm, Rm, R1421 and R15a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, )R4, and NR6R7; R3 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, xy, or -NR6R7; R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed; and R63 is kyl or heteroarylalkyl; R7, is H or alkyl, and R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In one embodiment, Rlb, R21), Rgb, R91), wa are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, halo, and 0R3; Rub, Rm’, R13b, R141) and R151) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, 5(0),,R4, )R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, kyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently ed from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R6 is arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl; R7 is H or alkyl, and R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In one embodiment, wherein R”, R23, Rsa, R921, R10a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, OMe, OPh, CF3, and ‘ and 8] Rlla, Rm, Rm, R1421 and R15a are ndently selected from the group consisting In one embodiment, wherein Rlb, RZb, Rgb, R9b, wa are ndently selected from the group consisting of H, F, OMe, OPh, CF3, and ' and Rub, RIZb, Rm, R14b and R1513 are independently selected from the group consisting fLNJLNH HO:8:o RAN/\AO / O O s?\ I'm/\NJk/NHZ O O OfH, CF3, H and 7 , EKG/\(O \ | F N / F In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIIb is: or F In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and s provided herein are of Formula XVIII: R2 R10 NR6R7 R8 X/ Formula XVIII or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8, R9 and R10 are independently ed from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, y, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; p is 0—2, and X is S(O)p or CR2, wherein each R is independently selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIII is a compound of Formula XVIIIa: R1 a R23 R1 03 NR6aR7a R8a 3/ R923 Formula XVIIIa 2] or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R”, Rza, Rga, R921 and R1021 are ndently selected from the group ting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, nitro, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, , alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, R621 and R721 are independently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6a and R73 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, and p is 0—2. 0] In one embodiment, Rla, Rza, Rsa, R9&1 and R10a are independently selected from the “51*” EA” group consisting of H, CH3, Cl, CF3, N02, OCH3, 7 0/, /N H 19, rlmwjfiogaguwN N\ Hy.\H/N 7 ) WO 12777 O H a 03 pk N H 35K0 O ,andM} \—' R6 and R7 are independently selected from en, CH3, CH2CH3 cyclopropyl, I)“ 3%”; @MflkN and R6 and R7 are combined toformar“ 2/00 20:31)3/GMT: including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached.

In one embodiment, Rla, Rza, Rsa, R9a and R10a are independently selected from the ,1 MG ,iwcrj:N group consisting of H, CH3, Cl, CF3, N02, OCH3, H JVNNNW0112‘““(WH No o 7 , g4!“ O O ‘ézNHg )L F‘sf‘sN0 CI H 5 ”be, N O O N/OA / l :P'J AA 11 31>)“; Mews“ H O H and M30\_‘ , 7 , R621 and R721 are independently selected from hydrogen, CH3, CH2CH3 cyclopropyl, N OJ 0 D: I MN / E/ks (\§—©o \\ H N ,andR6a andR7a - are comb1ned 7 , to form 119/ W/ 7 including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached. 4] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIIIa is: o O or K In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIII is a compound of Formula R1 b RZb R10b NRGbR7b R9b R R' Formula XVIIIb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlb, R213, Rga, R9b and R10b are ndently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, lkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, nitro, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, ryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, loxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure ing the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, R6b and R7b are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6a and R73 are combined to form a cyclic ure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl, and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, Rlb, RZb, RSb, R9b and wa are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, nitro, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, , 4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, , alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R6b and R7b are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6a and R7a are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached; R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl; and p is 0—2.

In one embodiment, Rlb, R21”, Rsa, R913 and R101) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, OCH3, SCF3; 4] R6b and R7b are independently ed from CH3 and R and R’ are H.

In another embodiment, Rlb, RZb, Rgb, R9b and wa are independently selected from the group ting of H, OCH3, SCF3; R6b and R7b are independently selected from CH3 and R and R’ are H.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIIIb is: /s F In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIII is selected with the proviso that if X is CH2, then NR6R7 is not indolinone or benzoimidazolone.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XVIIIb is selected with the proviso that ifR and R’ are both H, then NR6R7 is not indolinone or benzoimidazolone.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XIX: R1 N Formula XIX or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, oxo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, )R4, and NR6R7; R3 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; 6] R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, loxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or ; R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XIX is a compound of Formula XIXa: Formula XIXa or pharmaceutically able derivatives thereof, wherein R”, Rza, R8a and R9a are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, oxo and ; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, loxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5a is alkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; ] R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl or heteroarylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both ed; and p is 0-2.

In one embodiment, Rla, R23, R821 and R9&1 are independently selected from the group 0 CI consisting of H, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, N02, Who»0 g , ,1‘1- NHZ, 7 0 0 0‘ 0/ “A” 3X3”\ / O and 0/ ' and /N H I‘j\/©\ E o/ OOWO Rsais F , , ) 0 or +0 o o H “*0 N ‘r a u \5 ' “r: or In another embodiment, Rla, Rza, R8a and R9a are ndently selected from the W“s0 A1L9 group consisting of H, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, oxo, O , , NH2, 0 0 ‘K CIj3 5%;0/ )L E \ / O and 0/ , , ; and /N H HJJ\/©\ E o/ OOWO - F Raais F , , 7 O '0‘ +0 N W O O H (1‘r ”Ll-(“\C a ‘2) ' “oor In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XIXa is: F H O F 0/ / /‘C/\1 o / GS In one embodiment, the compound of formula XIX is selected with the proviso that the compound does not n a ide, a macrocycle, a thienopyridine or a thienopyrimidine.

In r embodiment, the disease to be treated with the nds of formula XIX is not hepatocellular .

In one embodiment, the compound of formula XIXa is selected with the proviso that the compound does not contain a hydrazide, a macrocycle, a thienopyridine or a thienopyrimidine.

In another embodiment, the disease to be treated with the compounds of formula XIXa is not hepatocellular cancer.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XX: Formula XX or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, l, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, 9] R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or rbonyl; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, arbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and p is 0—2.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XX is a compound of Formula XXa: / >/R23 a XXa or pharmaceutically acceptable tives thereof, wherein R1a is 0R3, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4 or NR6R7; R2a is alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, y, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, alkylaryloxy, cyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7; R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, lkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl; and 3] p is 0—2.

H i / / 771. \Cfiko \ In one embodiment, R121 is CH3, Bn, CI 1"!— , , H / ”1/ O H O N E—NH H \H/ F /N / 0 F O F a 0 NH F F F F F F JAN O’N\>\/ O N ff\N/\/N\/L\N J‘s": "“4 \ I NV© MNQ E/ O 7 7 7 7 “\J /o F0 :11633 cm / 0 2a is CH3, CHZCH3, R t—Bu, Ph, fill/Y, 5E(<01, K/LO/Y, , F F £1 /0O ,or1£8 ;and R and R’ are independently selected from en and CH3.

In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XXa is: N‘O \ / H ,o N NK/Nfiko/ >KL />—<NCI N F ‘N F O‘N O No 0 / H O O / H F F H H0 o F 0 (SN: N OccficNLG Hocoo €in PEP©~<NOmi; In r embodiment, the compound of Formula XX is a compound of Formula Formula XXb or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, 0] n R1b is alkyl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl; R2b is aryl, heteroaryl, or C(R)(R’)NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; and R and R’ are independently selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl.

In one embodiment R1bIS CH3, [0Hfl fWVNS”0 /00'? QS Ems/[LS O and fwifiin E—QOLQM Jok J<H O ] RZbis O H , ‘N, , E’Q’ (if).

In one embodiment, the nd of Formula XXb is: \ / Np NH 8 o \ N \ o \ ”0 JL 5‘ N N O 0’ NW, H O‘N s N D or N’0 In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XX is a nd of Formula XXc: R1YN>/sz/ Formula XXc or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1b is aryl or heteroaryl, and R2b is heterocyclyl.

In one embodiment, R1b is \ ; and 2] R2b is ,9“ In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XXc is: CfiokO 0{ 4] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XX is selected with the proviso that if R1 is l, then R2 is not phenyl.

In one embodiment, the nd of Formula XX is selected with the proviso that if R2 is pyridyl, then R1 is not phenyl or cyclohexyl.

In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XXI: R1 N R2 Ar 0 R8 Formula XXI or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1, R2 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R9 is H or alkyl, 0] R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, aryloxy, ryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or -NR6R7, R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl; R6 and R7 are independently ed from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, 4] p is 0—2, and Ar is aryl or heteroaryl.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XXI is a compound of Formula XXIa: R1 a N R23 Ar 0 R8a Formula XXIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rla, R2a and R8a are H or alkyl; R9a is H or alkyl; R5a is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or rbonyl; and Ar is aryl or heteroaryl.

In one embodiment, Rla, R2a and R8a are H; R9 is H or CH3; A}:I 0 R5a is Bn F 93, H /JLNH E/kESNf—OLYE/Y011;),iii—Q:—732%,“ E’D‘OfF 2016/068032 \N\ gYNV f ”a; S ”Rik [001445] Ar1s Ph z/Ooiflffi z/LN Br or In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XXIa is: OeN N O\ ,<\ \ N j N/:© o O$6 | [N E8 2—2:\ HN \N O F N] K/N Br or In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XXI is selected with the proviso that if Ar is pyridyl, then R5 is not phenyl. 8] In one embodiment, the compound of Formula XXIa is selected with the proviso that if Ar is pyridyl, then R5 is not phenyl.

In certain ments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are of Formula XXII: R2 (O)n Formula XXII or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, 1] wherein R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4, NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, l, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl, R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy, alkenyloxy, loxy, y, alkylaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, aralkoxy, or , R5 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, lkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached, n is 0 or 1, p is 0—2; and 8] each Ar is ndently selected from aryl or heteroaryl.

In another embodiment, the compound of Formula XXII is a compound of Formula XXIIa: W0 20171'112777 ArYW ArYN Ar R2 I a XXIIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is H or alkyl, R2a is H; 11 is O or 1, and each Ar is independently selected from aryl or aryl.

In another embodiment, Formula XXIIa is: ArYRla ArYN Ar Formula XXIIa or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1a is H or alkyl, R2a is H; 11 is O or 1, and each Ar is ndently selected from aryl or heteroaryl.

In one embodiment, R121 is H or CH3, R221 is H, 11 is O or 1, and fYNNJ,\ / \ Aris ndently selected from Ph, I"/©\ DI.17- / iii/Q , , § / N 0 gm Y) 3U“ :@m 401 AKENYA / @fi a“ O 3 , , ,and .

In one embodiment, R121 is H or CH3; R2a is H; n is 0 or 1; and f S E \W W’S\ Ar is independently selected from N‘N ISL and 0 , , , In one embodiment the compound of Formula XXIIa is: figs? W0 12777 ,N=( \ [N] CH o=é=o /N 0/ 0/ § @N o @N o s s \ / \ / W0 12777 / \ Z Np QNM/N ,N=N HN ,N O/ \0 N O ON S 3 \ / \I 0°31: N N N \\ I O N/ IO/ (g/S N 0\ F )\ l l / S N or '— In certain embodiments, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein are ed from the group consisting of the following: 2016/068032 .3 \N O O | \\S/N / \\/N 0 /\/©/\\ S 0 O \\ / N O | H \N \N | /S / fi/A F / F I F N\ NQ<FFQ N W N O 0 W\ CI CI O :s/0 / 0% \N / O O o \\s/N QCN / \\ \O O/ WO 12777 wo 12777 N N o NH2 WO 12777 \ o n | o o N/ H \©\/ HAKFF F o | N F N F W0 12777 F / N F / N\ K/N F ‘ % N N o %N F \ W\/ OH 0 N O\/N\)\/O W s\\o N N H \ O H \\/N o \O m \N O I 'O\[|\|1+ / o 2016/068032 K/N CF3 O \O/ O ” P / O\ Brby “FFN N F O F>(©\/N\/©)l\F o N '0\N+/o WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 CI é O O WO 12777 0 OH W0 12777 H \o\ N\ S O 2016/068032 \/0 N>:O o o N \ //O:©E‘\N/©/\0V / O \o 0/ O \ || \ N gN/V3 CI \ N O CM \o A CI ”5%cho N V W0 20171112777 2016/068032 o=s=o 3%O\/\/0OY©/\U WO 12777 .0/ \©\/ O Y Br FMF _ N| \ OWNTN / N O\/ \o O -o/N+*o 0 Br 0 V O N\JY \o O Nfi<F + )WF O¢N\O' O W0 12777 2016/068032 o a: CF‘DMéWO0 2“ \/o \IO O¢s//:)N/\© INI 85 [15%O O | O 0 || /0 N N\ ‘O/ O/\/O H O S \ N/\/O\ _ H Cl \s/N N and F . SYNTHESIS OF THE COMPOUNDS The compounds ed herein may be obtained from commercial sources or readily synthesized by methods well known to those of skill in the art. .1 Synthetic ures Amide OH O Rz-N/R1 + R3 < —> R2, JL N R H O | 3 Reagent A Reagent B A Vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of Reagent B, 1.6 mmol of DIPEA, and dry acetonitrile (1 mL). To the stirred reaction mixture 05 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an onal 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), and 0.72 mmol of 2-chloro-N—methylpyridinium iodide was added. The reaction Vial was placed into a water bath and left at 100 CC for 6 hrs. Reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and d by 6 mL of water. Then the vial was sonicated. If crystalline itate was formed it was filtered off. In case an oily product was formed the vial was left overnight, then the water layer was removed and 2-propanol (1 mL) was added to cause the crystallization. The precipitate was d, washed twice with a sodium carbonate solution, and then washed with methanol. Purification of the final compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

OH 0 R2 N/R1 + R3 < —> R2, JJ\ H O I}! R3 Reagent A Reagent B A vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of Reagent B, a t (1 mL of a solution of 200 g HOBt in 1 L of DMF), 0.57 mmol of Reagent A (in case of using amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the on mixture to er the amine to base form) and 0.66 mmol of EDC. In case the reaction e becomes highly s 0.5 mL ofDMF were added. In case the reaction mixture was a homogeneous the it was kept at room temperature for 72 hrs. Otherwise the reaction mixture was sonicated at room temperature for 5 days. Reaction mixture was diluted with 6 mL of 1% sodium phosphate water solution. Then the vial was sonicated. In case a crystalline precipitate was formed it was filtered off. In case an oily product was formed the product was dissolved in methanol and precipitated by an addition of 4% hydrochloric acid. Alternatively 2-propanol (1 mL) was mixed with the crude product and the mixture was sonicated. Then the solution was diluted with 5% aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate (the procedure repeated 2-3 times if necessary). Purification of the compounds was med via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors.

Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and rade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

WO 12777 OH 0 R2 N/R1 + R3—< —) R2. i H O 1?] R3 Reagent A Reagent B A vial was d with 0.57 mmol of Reagent B and dry DMF (1 mL). To the d reaction mixture 0.57 mmol of N,N-carbodiimidazole was added. After 1 hr of stirring the vial was open and the reaction mixture was left for 2 hrs in a drying oven at 60 0C, Then 0.52 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture) was added, the vial was firmly closed, and the reaction mixture was stirred.

The reaction vial was placed into a water bath and left at 100 0C for a time specified on the vial label. Reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and water was added until the vial was full. Then the vial was sonicated. In case a crystalline precipitate was formed the vial was passed to the filtration. In case an oily product was formed the vial was left overnight, then the water layer was removed and 2-propanol (1 mL) was added to cause the crystallization. The precipitate was d, washed twice with a sodium carbonate solution, and then washed with a water/2-propanol (1:1) solution. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems ed with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

OH O H O I 3 Reagent A Reagent B In a large vial 1.2 mmol of a t B was loaded, then 1 mmol of a Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the on mixture) and polymeric EDC (3 mmol, MW 833 g/mol) were added. 10 ml of solvent (30 g of pentaflourophenol in 1 L of dichloromethane) were added, the vial was closed and mixture was stirred. The vial was shaked continuously for 72 hours using shaker. Reaction mixture was filtered, WO 12777 collecting filtrate in a big tared vial. Precipitated polymer was preserved. Filtrate was evaporated, residue was weighed. If amount of the residue was low, then a small portion of ol (about 5 ml) was added to the precipitated polymer and shaked for 4 hours. Methanol solution was d to the vial with dried residue after the first filtration. Filtrate was evaporated again and the residue was passed to the chromatography. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 y systems equipped with DAD and etectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were zed Water (phase A) and HPLC- grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Oxadiazole synthesis N 0 o—< R1_<\ + Rz_/< mi \N 0 Y\ Reagent A Reagent B 0.6 mmol of Reagent B was loaded into a small vial. 0.6 mL of solvent (a solution of 200 g N—oxybenzotriazole in l L of DMF) and 0.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DTPEA was added to the reaction mixture) were added to it. 0.9 mmol ofEDC was added to the reactionary mixture after this. If the reactionary mixture was homogeneous it should be kept at the room temperature for 72 hours. If not, it should be sonicated for 5 days at the room temperature t any serious g. 0.6 mmol of TEA was added after this and the vial with the reactionary mixture was put into bain-marie and heated at 100C for a time ted on the vial label (ca. 3 h). The reactionary mixture was cooled than and 3 mL of CH2CL2 with water in amount enough to fill the vial was added to it. The organic layer was washed out with water two times. All water was removed after this and the product was forwarded for the further drying. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass—detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC—grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

WO 12777 NHZOH N—O OH Io—\< R1—_N —>— / R1 + R2—< _> N \ N N 0 Y Reagent A Reagent B R1 1.6 mmol of Reagent A was loaded in small vial then 2 ml of ethanol, 2.4mmol of hydroxylamine and 3.2 mmol of TEA were added. If the on mixture is not homogenous then another portion of ethanol (1 mL) was added, stirred for 3-4 hours on shaker and left at rt ght.

Then it was heated at 80°C for 3 hours and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The solid residue was dissolved in 1 mL of solvent (1 mL of a solution of 200 g HOBt in 1 L of DMF), 1.6 mmol of Reagent B and 2.4 mmol of CD1 and sonicated for 3 days at rt. In case the reaction mixture was viscous additional 1 mL ofDMF was added. Then 1.6 mmol of TEA were added and the vial was heated at 100°C for 3hours. The reaction e was , diluted with 3 m1 of water and extracted by 3 mL of CH2C12 . The organic layer was washed out with water two times.

All water was removed after this and the product was forwarded for the further drying. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and etectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard dge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Amino/amide synthesis O R O 0 R2 H I 2 ’ 2 I N—L—N N—L—H + RS , /N—L—N _.

R/ >/_Ra OH R1 >—R3 1 Reagent A Reagent B 1.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), 1.7 mmol of Reagent B, were added to 1 mL of a solution of 200g Benzotriazole-N—oxide in IL of DMF. To the stirred e 1.9 mmol of EDC was then added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 hours. The mixture was then diluted with 5ml of 1% sodium phosphate on, treated with ultrasound. After that 2 mL of HCl solution in oxane was added and the mixture was d with ultrasound for 4 hours. The solid or oily crude product formed was isolated and purified via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 y systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. ts used were deionized Water (phase A) and rade ol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Oxypyrimidine synthesis R1 o/\ R I 1 — NH + R3 _N —> I R NH A 2 2 R2 N R3 Reagent A Reagent B A small vial was d with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 1.6 mmol of Reagent B and lml of 4M dioxane solution of HCl. The vial was heated at 100°C for 4h. In case reaction mixture was too viscous additional 0.5ml of dioxane were added. Then it was diluted with 3 ml of water and extracted by 3 mL of CHC13. Organic layer was washed with water (2*2 mL), dried and evaporated.

The solid residue was purified by preparative chromatography. In case of reasonable amount of residue formed during extraction procedure it was separated from solution and purified by preparative chromatography. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC- grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Enamine sis R1j/ R2 ’R4 R1 R2 0 Ra—N —> J R T Reagent A Reagent B A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, lml ofDMF and 1.6 mmol of Reagent B. The reaction mixture was d and heated at 100°C for 4h. Then it was cooled to rt, In case of e formed it was filtered off and purified by preparative chromatography. Otherwise the reaction mixture was diluted with 3 ml of water and ted by 3 mL of CHC13. The organic layer was washed with water (2*2 mL), dried and evaporated. The solid residue was purified by ative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass—detectors.

Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC—grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient s were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Halogen displacement: carbon-oxygen/nitrogen/sulfur bond formation Rq—X\ + R2—Hal , ,X—R1 H R2 X = O,N,S Reagent B X = 0NS Reagent A To a stirred solution containing 0.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), 0.72 mmol of DIPEA, 80 mg of potassium iodide in 1 mL ofDMF and 0.6 mmol of Reagent B was added. The reaction e was allowed to stir on a boiling water bath for ca. 5 min. Upon a complete dissolution of the reagents the stirred reaction e was heated on the water bath for the time specified on the vial label. The reaction mixture was triturated with an excess of deionized water and sonicated until a crystalline precipitate was formed. In case the trituration with water did not cause the product precipitation 1 mL of 2-propanol with the subsequent sonication were applied d. The precipitate was filtered, washed twice with methanol, and dried. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard dge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

IR2 R3\ R1 N\ + Rs—Hal 5 ,N_R1 H R2 Reagent A Reagent B 1] A vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of t A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), dry DMF (2 mL), and 1.4 mmol of DIPEA. To the stirred reaction e 0.6 mmol of Reagent B was added. The firmly closed reaction vial was placed into a water bath and the on mixture was stirred at 100 °C until a complete dissolution of the reaction component occurs. Then the homogeneous reaction mixture was heated in the water bath at 100 0C for 6 hrs. The vial was passed to the polymer scavenger purification. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. Ethyl acetate (10 mL) and then wet anion resin (5 g) were added to the residue. The d mixture was heated in a water bath at 70 °C for 6 hrs. Then the resin was filtered off. The solution was transferred into a pre- weighted vial and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. Purification of the compounds was med via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard dge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Amine sis: Mannich Reaction R1 R1 CHZO O RZ—N + \ —> 0 Reagent A Reagent B R—N A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 2ml of methanol and 6.4 mmol of formaline. If the solution was not homogenous additional 0.5 mL of methanol were added, The reaction e was sonicated for 1h. Then 1.6 mmol of Reagent B were added and sonicated for another 1h. In case of substantial amount of residue formed it was filtered off, washed by iPrOH (water then iPrOH if TEA is present in the reaction mixture) and purified by preparative HPLC. ise the reaction mixture was diluted with 3 mL of water and extracted by 3 mL of CHCl3.

The c layer was washed with water (2*2 mL), dried and evaporated. The solid residue was purified by preparative HPLC on t 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass- detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Oxamide synthesis 0 K o N + Rz—N\ —> Ej/NWHL ,R3 R N 3 | 0 R2 t A Reagent B A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 1 mL of acetonitrile, 2.9 mmol of DIPEA and 1.6 mmol of ethyl chlorooxalate. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at rt and 1.76 mmol of Reagent B were added. The vial was heated at 100°C for 6h. The reaction mixture was cooled to rt, d with 3 mL of water and extracted by 3 mL of CHCl3. The c layer was washed with water (2*2 mL), dried and evaporated. The solid residue was purified by preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and etectors.

Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC—grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Ether synthesis R70, + RZ—Hal IO—R1 H R2 Reagent A Reagent B A small vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), followed by 80 mg of potassium iodide in 0.7 mL DMF, and then 0.6 mmol of Reagent B. After stirring 1 mL 4M on ofKOH in ol was added, the vial was closed tightly and shaked. Next the vial was sonicated for 24 h at the temperature no more than 35°C. After that the vial was filled with chloroform to the brim. After stirring the organic layer was washed twice with water and dried.

Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B).

Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound ties.

Bicyclic synthesis N O N’R1 Hell \R, + gr —» Hetl R2 R3 IR3 ? Q Reagent A Reagent B A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 1 mL of pyridine and 1.6 mmol of Reagent B, strirred. Then 6.4 mmol of l were added and the on mixture was stirred and heated at 100°C for 8h. Then it was cooled to rt and 1.9 mmol of TEA were added and the vial was heated for another 30 min at 100°C. Then the reaction mixture was diluted with 3 ml of water and extracted by 3 mL of CHC13. The organic layer was washed with water (3*2 mL), dried and evaporated. The solid residue was d by preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 y systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used.

Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Methyl amine synthesis: reductive amination I 2 0 RTN‘H + R,_< _> N: H R3/ R1 Reagent A t B 0.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture) was dissolved in 3 mL of methanol and the reaction mixture was stirred in a vial at r. t. Then 0.6 mmol of Reagent B was added to the stirred solution.

The vial with the reaction mixture was sonicated at 58-60 0C for 60-90 min until a complete dissolution of the reagents. Up to 5 mL of itrile could be added to te the dissolution of the ts. The reaction vial was cooled to 0 OC and sodium dride (150 mg) was added to the reaction mixture in small portions. The reaction mixture was stirred in the open vial until sodium borohydride was dissolved. The reaction vial was sonicated for 2 hrs at r. t., closed, and allowed to stand ght at r. t. Then the open reaction vial was sonicated at 50 °C until methanol was nearly completely evaporated. The reaction mixture was triturated with 5 mL of methanol and stirred until the large part of it was ved. The insoluble part largely consisted of inorganic salts. The product was purified by passing the methanolic suspension through ionic polymer scavengers. In the case of an incomplete dissolution of the product in methanol 5 mL of deionized water could be added to the methanolic suspension g presipitation of the product and dissolution of the inorganic contaminants. In the case of an emulsion formation upon addition of methanol the reaction mixture was filtered h a small chromatographic column filled with 8 g of silica gel. The product was eluted with methanol and the solvent d under reduced pressure to yield the product. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC- grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography nt methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Sulfonamide synthesis R O 0 R I 2 || || / 1 er + Ra—fi—Cl —> RS—fi—N o 0 R2 t A Reagent B A vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), acetonitrile (1 mL), and 0.72 mmol of triethylamine. To the stirred reaction mixture 0.6 mmol of Reagent B was added. The vial was placed in a water bath and heated at 100 °C for 2 hrs. 2% Hydrochloric acid (2 mL) was added to the on mixture and the vial was shaken. In case a solid precipitate was formed the vial was passed to the filtration. In case an oily product was formed the vial was sonicated to cause the crystallization. Additional measures to cause the crystallization of the oily product, e.g., varying the amount of water and an increase of the sonication time, can be taken. Purification of the compounds was performed via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and etectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset tography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Sulfide synthesis N N R1—Hal + RZ—Hal —’ R/ R t A Reagent B A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 0.7ml ofDMF and 1.76 mmol of thiourea. The on mixture was stirred and heated at 100°C for 2h. Then it was cooled to It and 1 mL of 4M KOH solution and 1.6 mmol of Reagent B were added. The reaction mixture was sonicated for 24h. Then it was diluted with 3 mL of water and extracted by 3 mL of CHC13. In case of residue formed it was filtered off and purified by ative tography. The organic layer was washed with water (2*2 mL), dried and evaporated. The solid e was purified by preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass—detectors.

Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC—grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound ties.

Sulfone synthesis H202 || R1—SH + R2—Hal —> R1—3 Reagent A Reagent B 9] A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 1 mL of i-PrOH, 1.6 mmol of Reagent B and 1 mL of 4M KOH solution. The reaction mixture was sonicated at 50-60°C for 2h.

Then 1 ml of methanol, 0.175 mL of H, 0.45 mL of 50% H202 and 0175 mL of 10% solution of ammonium molibdate were added. The reaction mixture was sonicated at 70°C for 5 h.

Then it was diluted with 3 mL of water and extracted by 3 mL of CHCl3. In case of residue formed it was filtered off and purified by preparative chromatography. The c layer was washed with % NaHCO3 solution (5 mL), dried and evaporated. The solid residue was purified by preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 um, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Thiazole synthesis AV) + N /U\/Hal R_</\ if R2 2 NAN/Rm R1a I Reagent A Reagent B 2016/068032 A vial was charged with 1.6 mmol of Reagent A, 1.5 mL ofDMF and 1.6 mmol of Reagent B. The reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 2 hours. After cooling to rt 0.2 ml of DIPEA, 3 mL of water were added and ted by 3 mL of CHCl3. Organic layer was washed by water (2*1 mL), dried and ated. The solid residue was purified via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 Infinity systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartiidge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Urea synthesis R O o / 2 F R1—N + R3\ AO/XF —> R \ JJ\ /R1 \H N 3 N [Tl Reagent A Reagent B A vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of t A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), 2 mL of acetonitrile and 0.6 mmol of DIPEA. The vial was left for 30 minutes, then 0.6 mmol of Reagent B was loaded. A vial was placed in a boiling water bath and heated up for 8 hours, then left for 30 minutes to cool down. 1 mL of water was added to the mixture and the vial was sonicated. If the residue has crystallized, the mixture was stirred until uniform and passed to filtration, otherwise the water was added until vial was full and rd workup was used. ed solid was washed with 1ml of 1:1 isopropyl alcohol—water mixture 2 times. Purification of the compounds was med via preparative HPLC on Agilent 1260 y systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC- grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography gradient methods were chosen on the basis of compound properties. 0%o/i O R1-NH2 + Rz-NHZ F R1. i ,Rz Reagent A Reagent B A vial was charged with 0.6 mmol of Reagent A (in case of amine salt, an additional 1.5 equivalent amount of DIPEA was added to the reaction mixture), 2 mL of acetonitrile, 0.9 mmol of DIPEA and then 0.6 mmol of 2,2,2-trifluoroethylcloroformate dropwise. After left for 0.5 hrs, 0.73 mmol of Reagent B was added to the mixture. The vial was placed in the water boiling bath for 8 hrs. After 0.5 hrs cooling down 1 mL of water was added and the Vial was passed to sonication. The outcome precipitate was filtered and washed twice with lml of 50% water solution of 2-propanol). Purification of the compounds was performed Via ative HPLC on Agilent 1260 ty systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunflre C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm was used. Solvents used were deionized Water (phase A) and HPLC-grade Methanol (phase B). Preset chromatography nt s were chosen on the basis of compound properties.

Piperidino-oxypyrimidine synthesis o o 0 o A B C O/\ o/\ | NH NH —> N/ NH2 —> I —> I / N / N / + N \ N \ N o N O NH HCI N | N | H I / HCI / 1 2 3 4 5 ID orE N N \ R/KO I Step A: To a solution of compound 1 (50.0 g, 290 mmol) in chloroform (400 mL) Me3OBF4 (34.5 g, 220 mmol) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 h and then washed with ted aqueous solution of K2CO3 (2 X 300 mL). The organic layer was separated, dried over MgSO4, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by vacuum distillation (b.p. 78°C at 1 torr) to give 45.6 g (247 mmol, 85%) of compound 2 as a colorless oil.

Step B: Na (12.7 g, 550 mmol) was dissolved in EtOH (200 mL). Compound 3 (37.5 g, 238 mmol) was added to the solution and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 0.5 h. Then compound 2 (45.6 g, 247 mmol) was added, the reaction was refluxed for 4 h, and then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and lized with 10% HCl. The precipitated solid was filtered and re-crystallized from i-PrOH to yield 40.8 g (179 mmol, 75%) of compound 4 as white solid.

Step C: To a suspension of compound 4 (0.020 g, 0.088 mmol) of in dry itrile (2 mL) a solution of 10% HCl in dry dioxane was added dropwise until pH 3. After standing for 0.5 h the solvents were removed in vacuum to obtain 0.023 g (0.088 mmol, 100%) of target nd Step D: To a solution of compound 4 (0.150 g, 0.66 mmol) and DIPEA (0.256 g, 1.98 mmol) in acetonitrile the corresponding acid chloride was added (1-3 eq.). The resulting mixture was stirred under reflux for 3 hours and then ated in vacuo. The residue was d by HPLC. The obtained product was suspended in dry acetonitrile. 10% HCl in dry dioxane was added dropwise until pH 3. After standing for 0.5 h the solvents were removed under reduced pressure to yield target amides 6.

Step E: To a solution of compound 4 (0.150 g, 0.66 mmol) in acetonitrile [(4- methoxybenzyl)oxy]acetic acid (0.129 g, 0.66 mmol), DIPEA (0.46 mL, 2.64 mmol), and DMAP (0.005 g, 0.04 mmol) were added. Then TBTU (0.847 g, 2.64 mmol) was added, the resulting e was refluxed for 8 hours, and ated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by HPLC to yield the target amide 6.

WO 12777 /\ /\ O 0 NH2 _.

NH HCI '4':ch_. No=$=|0NR 1 2 3 In 5 (1%“ N N/ le RAG / Step A: To a solution of compound 1 (50.0 g, 290 mmol) in chloroform (400 mL) Me3OBF4 (34.5 g, 220 mmol) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 h and then washed with saturated aqueous solution of K2C03 (2 X 300 mL). The organic layer was separated, dried over MgSO4, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by vacuum lation (b.p. 78°C at 1 torr) to give 45.6 g (247 mmol, 85%) of compound 2 as a colorless oil.

Step B: Na (12.7 g, 550 mmol) was dissolved in EtOH (200 mL). Compound 3 (37.5 g, 238 mmol) was added to the solution and the resulting e was stirred at room temperature for 0.5 h. Then compound 2 (45.6 g, 247 mmol) was added, the reaction was refluxed for 4 h, and then ated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and neutralized with 10% HCl. The precipitated solid was filtered and re-crystallized from i-PrOH to yield 40.8 g (179 mmol, 75%) of compound 4 as white solid.

Step C: To a on of compound 4 (0.150 g, 0.66 mmol) and DIPEA (0.256 g, 1.98 mmol) in acetonitrile corresponding sulfonyl chloride (0.99 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) was added. The resulting mixture was d under reflux for 2 h and then evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by HPLC to yield the target compounds 5 Step D: To a solution of compound 4 (0.150 g, 0.66 mmol) and DIPEA (0.256 g, 1.98 mmol) in acetonitrile the ponding acid chloride was added (1 .3-4 eq.). The resulting mixture was stirred under reflux for 3 h and then evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by HPLC to yield the target amides 6. 2016/068032 Thieno-oxypyrimidine synthesis / / NH2 H I Br \ H I A / N / \ B N o + m | / —> I I | \ N —> s N s s NC N/ o o o 1 2 3 l c \S O I IN \0 / D H | N \ N / N o s 6 o 5 Step A: To a solution compound 1 (30 g, 0.19 mol) in 300 mL dioxane HCl was added compound 2 (23.85 g, 0.23 mol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight, diluted dioxane (300 mL), refluxed for 3h, cooled and ated. The resulting e was washed by mixture EtOAc-iPrOH (l : 2). The yield was 36 g (0.157 mol, 83%).

Step B: To a solution compound 3 (36 g, 0.157 mol) in 650 mL acetic acid bromine (35 mL) was added at rt. The reaction mixture was refluxed 48h, cooled, evaporated, diluted with water. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water and dried. The yield was 45 g (0.146 mol, 93%).

Step C: The mixture compound 4 (3 5g, 0.114 mol) and 1,1’— Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane 64054 (2% mol) in methanol (500 ml) was stirred overnight under CO (10 bar) in autoclave. The reaction mixture was filtered and evaporated. The resulting residue was washed with water and dried. The yield was 26 g (0.091 mol, 80%).

Step D: Compound 5 (16 g, 0.055 mol) was added to a solution NaOH (21 g, 0.525 mol) in 600 mL methanol. The reaction mixture was refluxed overnight, ated. The solid residue was washed by water and air-dried. The yield was 12.7 g (0.046 mol, 84%).

NHZ Br $0 H NH H \ A T 23 N NH / \ o HN _. / 2 + \\-—CI I , / N l T o H3N+ S 1 2 3 0 7 4 0 OH i o \ o H o N NH2 D / H NH I | ‘— 2 s | T s 5 Step A: The mixture of nd 1 (50 g, 0.318 mol), compound 2 (54.86 g, 0.477 mol) and methylsulfonylmethane (150.6 g, 1.59 mol) was refluxed overnight, cooled and evaporated. The resulting e was washed mixture EtOAc-iPrOH (l : 2). The yield was 41.65 g (0.249 mol, 78%).

Step B: To a solution compound 3 (41.65 g, 0.249 mol) in 700 mL acetic acid was added bromine (42 mL) at rt. The reaction mixture was refluxed 48h, cooled, evaporated, diluted with water. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water and dried. The yield was 51 g (0.207 mol, 83%).

Step C: The mixture of compound 4 (35g, 0.142 mol) and 1,1'- Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane CAS95464054 (2% mol) in methanol (500 ml) was stirred overnight under CO (10 bar) in autoclave. The reaction mixture was filtered and evaporated. The resulting e was washed with water and dried. The yield was 28 g (0.124 mol, 88%).

Step D: Compound 5 (15 g, 0.067 mol) was added to a on of NaOH (20 g, 0.5 mol) in 600 mL ol. The on mixture was refluxed overnight, evaporated. The solid residue was washed by water and air-dried. The yield was 11.2 g (0.053 mol, 79%).

Amide synthesis from compound 6: The mixture of 1.1 eq of acid 6 and 1 eq of corresponding amine was dissolved in 1 ml of HOBt solution in DMF (9.5% wt). Then 1.2 eq of EDC was added and on mixture was left stirring at rt ght (16-18h). After completion of the reaction, monitored by LCMS, the reaction mixture was diluted with 4 mL of distilled water and left at ultrasonic bath for 30-40 min. The resulting residue was filtered off, washed by water and dried under high vacuum. If there was no residue formed the aqueous solution was extracted by 2016/068032 4 mL ofDCM and the organic layer was washed by water (2*4 mL) and the solvent was d under d pressure. In case of low purity of the final compound was subjected to preparative HPLC purification.

Purification and analytical procedures: Purification was performed using HPLC (H20 — MeOH, Agilent 1260 y systems equipped with DAD and mass-detectors. Waters Sunfire C18 OBD Prep Column, 100A, 5 pm, 19 mm X 100 mm with SunFire C18 Prep Guard Cartridge, 100A, 10 um, 19 mm X 10 mm) The material was dissolved in 0.7 mL DMSO. Flow : 30mL/min. Purity of the obtained fractions was checked via the analytical LCMS. Spectra were recorded for each fraction as it was obtained straight after chromatography in the solution form. The solvent was evaporated under the N2 flow upon heating to 80 °C. On the basis of post-chromatography LCMS analysis fractions were united.

Solid fractions were dissolved in 0.5 mL MeOH and transferred into a pre-weighted marked vials.

Obtained ons were again evaporated under the N2 flow upon g to 80 CC. After drying, products were finally characterized by LCMS and 1H NMR.

NMR Instrument specifications: Bruker AVANCE DRX 500, Varian UNITYplus 400. 3] LC/MS Instrument specifications: Agilent 1100 Series LC/MSD system with DAD\ELSD and Agilent LC\MSD VL (G1956A), SL (G1956B) mass-spectrometer. Agilent 1200 Series LC/MSD system with DAD\ELSD and Agilent LC\MSD SL (G6130A), SL (G6140A) mass- spectrometer. All the LC/MS data were obtained using positive/negative mode switching. Column ZorbaX SB-C18 1.8 pm 4.6X15mm Rapid Resolution cartridge (PN 821975—932) Mobile phase A — acetonitrile, 0.1% formic acid, B — water (0.1% formic acid) Flow rate 3ml/min Gradient 0 min — 100% B, 0.01 min —100% B, 1.5 min - 0% B, 1.8 min - 0% B, 1.81 min -100% B. ion volume 1 pl. Ionization mode atmospheric re chemical ionization (APCI). Scan range m/z 80-1000 2016/068032 Table 1: Mass Spectral Data calclaca calccc 229 1 2292 363 1 3630 4072 4072 3912 3912 3842 3840 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 6. PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein contain eutically effective amounts of one or more of compounds provided herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.

The compounds can be formulated into suitable pharmaceutical preparations such as solutions, suspensions, tablets, dispersible s, pills, capsules, s, sustained e formulations or elixirs, for oral administration or in sterile solutions or suspensions for ophthalmic or parenteral administration, as well as transdermal patch preparation and dry powder inhalers.

Typically the nds described above are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using techniques and ures well known in the art (see, e. g., Ansel Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Seventh Edition 1999).

In the compositions, effective concentrations of one or more compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts is (are) mixed with a suitable ceutical carrier or vehicle.

In certain embodiments, the concentrations of the compounds in the compositions are effective for delivery of an amount, upon administration, that treats, ts, or ameliorates one or more of the symptoms and/or progression of a disease or er sed herein.

Typically, the compositions are ated for single dosage administration. To ate a composition, the weight on of compound is dissolved, suspended, dispersed or otherwise mixed in a selected vehicle at an effective concentration such that the treated condition is relieved or ameliorated. Pharmaceutical carriers or vehicles suitable for administration of the compounds provided herein include any such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration.

In on, the compounds may be formulated as the sole pharmaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be combined with other active ingredients. Liposomal suspensions, including tissue—targeted liposomes, such as tumor-targeted liposomes, may also be suitable as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These may be ed according to methods known to those skilled in the art. For example, liposome formulations may be prepared as known in the art. Briefly, liposomes such as multilamellar vesicles (MLV's) may be formed by drying down egg phosphatidyl choline and brain phosphatidyl serine (7:3 molar ratio) on the inside of a flask. A solution of a compound provided herein in phosphate buffered saline lacking divalent cations (PBS) is added and the flask shaken until the lipid film is dispersed. The resulting vesicles are washed to remove unencapsulated compound, pelleted by centrifugation, and then resuspended in PBS.

The active compound is ed in the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful effect in the absence of rable side effects on the patient treated. The therapeutically effective concentration may be determined cally by g the compounds in in vitro and in vivo s described herein and then olated therefrom for dosages for humans. In some embodiments, the active compound is administered in a method to achieve a therapeutically effective concentration of the drug. In some embodiments, a companion stic (see, e.g., Olsen D and Jorgensen JT, Front. Oncol., 2014 May 16, 4: 105, doi: 10.3389/fonc.2014.00105) is used to determine the therapeutic concentration and safety profile of the active compound in specific patients or t populations. 0] The concentration of active compound in the pharmaceutical composition will depend on absorption, tissue distribution, inactivation and excretion rates of the active compound, the physicochemical characteristics of the compound, the dosage schedule, and amount administered as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. For example, the amount that is delivered is sufficient to ameliorate one or more of the symptoms of a disease or disorder sed .

In certain embodiments, a therapeutically effective dosage should produce a serum concentration of active ingredient of from about 0.1 ng/mL to about 50-100 ug/mL. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions provide a dosage of from about 0.001 mg to about 2000 mg of compound per kilogram of body weight per day. Pharmaceutical dosage unit forms are prepared to provide from about 1 mg to about 1000 mg and in certain embodiments, from about 10 to about 500 mg of the essential active ingredient or a combination of essential ingredients per dosage unit form.

The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be stered at intervals of time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the disease being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be r understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the WO 12777 person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed compositions.

Thus, effective concentrations or amounts of one or more of the compounds described herein or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are mixed with a le pharmaceutical r or vehicle for systemic, topical or local administration to form pharmaceutical compositions. Compounds are ed in an amount effective for rating one or more symptoms of, or for treating, retarding progression, or preventing. The concentration of active compound in the composition will depend on absorption, tissue distribution, inactivation, excretion rates of the active compound, the dosage schedule, amount administered, particular formulation as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art.

The compositions are intended to be administered by a suitable route, including but not limited to oral, eral, subcutaneous, enous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, l, dermal, transdermal, buccal, rectal, topical, local, nasal or inhalation. For oral administration, capsules and tablets can be formulated. The compositions are in liquid, iquid or solid form and are formulated in a manner suitable for each route of stration.

Solutions or sions used for parenteral, intradermal, subcutaneous, or topical application can include any of the following components: a sterile diluent, such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oil, polyethylene glycol, glycerine, propylene glycol, dimethyl acetamide or other synthetic solvent; antimicrobial , such as benzyl alcohol and methyl parabens; antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid and sodium ite; chelating agents, such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA); buffers, such as acetates, es and phosphates; and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. Parenteral preparations can be enclosed in ampules, pens, disposable syringes or single or multiple dose vials made of glass, c or other suitable material.

In instances in which the compounds exhibit insufficient solubility, methods for solubilizing compounds may be used. Such methods are known to those of skill in this art, and include, but are not limited to, using cosolvents, such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), using surfactants, such as TWEEN®, or dissolution in aqueous sodium bicarbonate.

Upon mixing or addition of the compound(s), the resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsion or the like. The form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the disease, disorder or condition treated and may be empirically determined.

The pharmaceutical compositions are provided for administration to humans and s in unit dosage forms, such as tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granules, sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions, and oral solutions or suspensions, and oil water emulsions containing suitable ties of the nds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts f. The pharmaceutically therapeutically active compounds and salts thereof are formulated and administered in unit dosage forms or multiple dosage forms. Unit dose forms as used herein refer to ally discrete units suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged dually as is known in the art. Each unit dose contains a predetermined quantity of the therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the d therapeutic effect, in ation with the required pharmaceutical carrier, e or diluent. Examples of unit dose forms include ampules and syringes and individually packaged tablets or es. Unit dose forms may be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. A multiple dose form is a plurality of identical unit dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit dose form. Examples of multiple dose forms include vials, bottles of s or capsules or bottles of pints or gallons.

Hence, multiple dose form is a multiple of unit doses which are not ated in packaging.

Sustained-release preparations can also be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained-release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the compound provided herein, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e. g., films, or microcapsule. Examples of sustained-release matrices include iontophoresis patches, polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2—hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol)), polylactides, copolymers of L—glutamic acid and ethyl-L-glutamate, non-degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate, able lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as the LUPRON M (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate), and poly-D-(—)—3-hydroxybutyric acid. While polymers such as ethylene-vinyl acetate and lactic acid-glycolic acid enable release of les for over 100 days, certain hydrogels release ns for shorter time periods. When encapsulated compound remain in the body for a long time, they may denature or aggregate as a result of exposure to moisture at 37 °C, resulting in a loss of biological activity and le changes in their structure. Rational strategies can be devised for stabilization depending on the mechanism of action involved. For e, if the aggregation mechanism is discovered to be intermolecular S--S bond formation through thio-disulfide interchange, ization may be achieved by modifying sulfhydryl residues, lyophilizing from acidic solutions, controlling moisture content, using appropriate additives, and developing specific polymer matiix itions.

Dosage forms or compositions containing active ient in the range of 0.005% to 100% with the balance made up from non toxic carrier may be prepared. For oral administration, a pharmaceutically acceptable non toxic composition is formed by the incorporation of any of the normally employed excipients, such as, for example pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, talcum, cellulose tives, sodium crosscarmellose, glucose, sucrose, magnesium carbonate or sodium saccharin. Such compositions e solutions, sions, tablets, capsules, powders and sustained release formulations, such as, but not limited to, implants and microencapsulated delivery systems, and biodegradable, biocompatible polymers, such as collagen, ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, ycolic acid, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid and others. Methods for preparation of these compositions are known to those skilled in the art. The contemplated compositions may contain about 0.001% 100% active ingredient, in certain embodiments, about 0.1 85% or about 75-95%.

The active compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be prepared with carriers that protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as time release formulations or coatings.

The compositions may e other active compounds to obtain desired combinations of properties. The compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof as described herein, may also be advantageously administered for therapeutic or prophylactic purposes together with another pharmacological agent known in the general art to be of value in treating one or more of the es or l conditions referred to hereinabove, such as diseases d to oxidative stress. It is to be understood that such combination therapy tutes a further aspect of the compositions and s of ent provided herein. 3] Lactose-free compositions provided herein can contain excipients that are well known in the art and are listed, for example, in the US. Pharmocopia (USP) SP NF (XVI).

In general, lactose-free compositions contain an active ingredient, a binder/filler, and a lubricant in 2016/068032 pharmaceutically compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable s. ary lactose-free dosage forms contain an active ingredient, microcrystalline cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch and magnesium stearate.

Further encompassed are anhydrous ceutical compositions and dosage forms containing a compound provided herein. For example, the addition of water (e. g., 5%) is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel , NY, NY, 1995, pp. 379-80. In effect, water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds. Thus, the effect of water on a formulation can be of great cance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment and use of formulations.

Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms provided herein can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity ions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine are anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.

An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions are packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable ing include, but are not d to, hermetically sealed foils, cs, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs and strip packs.

Oral Dosage Forms Oral ceutical dosage forms are either solid, gel or liquid. The solid dosage forms are tablets, capsules, granules, and bulk powders. Types of oral tablets include compressed, chewable lozenges and tablets which may be enteric coated, sugar coated or film coated. Capsules may be hard or soft gelatin capsules, while granules and powders may be provided in non effervescent or escent form with the ation of other ingredients known to those skilled in the art.

In certain ments, the formulations are solid dosage forms, such as capsules or tablets. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder; a diluent; a disintegrating agent; a lubricant; a glidant; a sweetening agent; and a flavoring agent. 9] Examples of binders include microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth, glucose on, acacia mucilage, n solution, sucrose and starch paste. Lubricants include talc, starch, magnesium or calcium stearate, lycopodium and stearic acid. ts include, for e, lactose, sucrose, starch, , salt, mannitol and dicalcium phosphate. Glidants include, but are not limited to, colloidal silicon dioxide. Disintegrating agents include crosscarmellose sodium, sodium starch glycolate, alginic acid, corn starch, potato , bentonite, methylcellulose, agar and carboxymethylcellulose, Coloring agents include, for example, any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, mixtures thereof; and water insoluble FD and C dyes suspended on alumina hydrate. Sweetening agents include sucrose, lactose, mannitol and artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin, and any number of spray dried flavors. Flavoring agents include l flavors ted from plants such as fruits and tic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant sensation, such as, but not limited to peppermint and methyl salicylate. Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene laural ether. Emetic coatings include fatty acids, fats, waxes, shellac, ammoniated c and cellulose e phthalates. Film coatings include hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000 and cellulose acetate phthalate.

If oral administration is desired, the nd could be provided in a composition that protects it from the acidic environment of the stomach. For example, the composition can be formulated in an c coating that ins its integrity in the stomach and releases the active compound in the intestine. The composition may also be formulated in combination with an antacid or other such ingredient.

When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it can contain, in addition to material of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, dosage unit forms can contain various other materials which modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar and other enteric agents. The nds can also be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, sprinkle, chewing gum or the like. A syrup may contain, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.

The active als can also be mixed with other active materials which do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired , such as antacids, H2 blockers, and diuretics. The active ingredient is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof as described herein, Higher concentrations, up to about 98% by weight of the active ingredient may be ed.

Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers included in tablets are binders, lubricants, diluents, disintegrating agents, coloring agents, flavoring agents, and wetting agents. Enteric coated tablets, e of the enteric coating, resist the action of stomach acid and ve or disintegrate in the neutral or alkaline intestines. Sugar coated tablets are compressed tablets to which different layers of pharmaceutically acceptable substances are applied. Film coated tablets are compressed tablets which have been coated with a polymer or other suitable g. Multiple compressed tablets are compressed tablets made by more than one compression cycle utilizing the pharmaceutically able substances previously mentioned. Coloring agents may also be used in the above dosage forms. Flavoring and sweetening agents are used in compressed tablets, sugar coated, multiple compressed and chewable tablets. Flavoring and sweetening agents are ally useful in the formation of chewable tablets and lozenges.

Liquid oral dosage forms include aqueous solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutions and/or suspensions reconstituted from non effervescent granules and effervescent preparations reconstituted from effervescent granules. Aqueous solutions include, for example, elixirs and syrups. Emulsions are either oil in—water or water in oil. In some embodiments, the suspension is a suspension of articles or nanoparticles. In some embodiments, the emulsion is an emulsion of microparticles or nanoparticles.

Elixirs are clear, sweetened, hydroalcoholic ations. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in elixirs include ts. Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may contain a preservative. An emulsion is a two phase system in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout r liquid.

Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in emulsions are non aqueous liquids, emulsifying agents and preservatives. sions use pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agents and vatives. Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in non escent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, e diluents, ners and wetting agents.

Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, e c acids and a source of carbon dioxide. Coloring and flavoring agents are used in all of the above dosage forms.

Solvents include glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol and syrup. Examples of preservatives include in, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic add, sodium te and alcohol. Examples of non aqueous liquids ed in emulsions include mineral oil and cottonseed oil. Examples of emulsifying agents include gelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate. Suspending agents include sodium ymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum and acacia. Diluents include lactose and sucrose. Sweetening agents include sucrose, syrups, glycerin and artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin. Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene lauryl ether. Organic adds include citric and tartaric acid. Sources of carbon dioxide include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate.

Coloring agents include any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, and mixtures thereof. Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such fruits, and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant taste ion.

For a solid dosage form, the solution or suspension, in for example propylene carbonate, ble oils or cerides, is ulated in a gelatin e. Such solutions, and the preparation and encapsulation thereof, are disclosed in US. Patent Nos 4,328,245, 4,409,239, and 4,410,545. For a liquid dosage form, the solution, e.g., for example, in a polyethylene glycol, may be diluted with a sufficient quantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e. g., water, to be easily ed for administration.

Alternatively, liquid or semi solid oral formulations may be prepared by dissolving or dispersing the active compound or salt in vegetable oils, glycols, cerides, propylene glycol esters (e.g., propylene carbonate) and other such carriers, and encapsulating these solutions or suspensions in hard or soft gelatin capsule shells. Other useful formulations include, but are not limited to, those containing a compound provided herein, a dialkylated mono- or poly-alkylene , including, but not limited to, methoxymethane, diglyme, triglyme, tetraglyme, polyethylene glycoldimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-SSO-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycoldimethyl ether wherein 350, 550 and 750 refer to the approximate e molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol, and one or more antioxidants, such as butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), propyl gallate, vitamin E, hydroquinone, 3 l4 hydroxycoumarins, ethanolamine, in, cephalin, ascorbic acid, malic acid, sorbitol, phosphoric acid, thiodipropionic acid and its esters, and dithiocarbamates.

Other formulations include, but are not limited to, aqueous alcoholic ons including a pharmaceutically acceptable acetal. Alcohols used in these formulations are any pharmaceutically acceptable water-miscible solvents having one or more hydroxyl groups, including, but not limited to, ene glycol and ethanol. Acetals include, but are not limited to, di(lower alkyl) acetals of lower alkyl aldehydes such as acetaldehyde diethyl acetal.

In all embodiments, tablets and capsules formulations may be coated as known by those of skill in the art in order to modify or sustain dissolution of the active ingredient. Thus, for example, they may be coated with a conventional enterically digestible coating, such as phenylsalicylate, waxes and cellulose acetate phthalate.

Injectables, solutions and emulsions Parenteral stration, generally terized by injection, either subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously is also contemplated herein. Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or sion in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions. In some embodiments, the suspension is a suspension of microparticles or nanoparticles. In some embodiments, the emulsion is an emulsion of microparticles or nanoparticles. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, glycerol or l. In addition, if desired, the ceutical compositions to be administered may also contain minor amounts of non toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering , stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, anolamine oleate and cyclodextrins. Implantation of a slow release or sustained release system, such that a constant level of dosage is maintained is also contemplated herein. Briefly, a compound provided herein is dispersed in a solid inner matrix, e. g., polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, oprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene—vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, methylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hilic polymers such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, cross-linked polyvinylalcohol and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, that is surrounded by an outer ric ne, e.g., polyethylene, opylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, methyl siloxanes, neoprene rubber, nated polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, Vinylchloride mers with vinyl acetate, vinylidene chloride, ethylene and propylene, ionomer hylene terephthalate, butyl rubber epichlorohydrin rubbers, ethylene/vinyl alcohol copolymer, ethylene/vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol terpolymer, and ne/vinyloxyethanol copolymer, that is insoluble in body fluids. The compound diffuses through the outer polymeric membrane in a release rate controlling step. The tage of active compound contained in such parenteral itions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the ty of the compound and the needs of the subject. eral administration of the compositions includes enous, subcutaneous and intramuscular administrations. Preparations for eral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products, such as lyophilized powders, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions. The solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous.

If administered intravenously, suitable carriers include physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.

Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in parenteral preparations include aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable nces.

Examples of aqueous es include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection, Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection.

Nonaqueous parenteral vehicles include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil. Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations must be added to eral preparations packaged in multiple dose ners which include s or s, ials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chlofide. Isotonic agents include sodium de and dextrose. Buffers include phosphate and citrate. idants include sodium bisulfate. Local anesthetics include procaine hydrochloride. Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcelluose, ypropyl cellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone.

Emulsifying agents include Polysorbate 80 (TWEEN® 80), A sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions include EDTA. Pharmaceutical carriers also include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.

The concentration of the pharmaceutically active nd is adjusted so that an injection provides an effective amount to produce the desired pharmacological effect. The exact dose s on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art.

The unit dose parenteral preparations are packaged in an ampule, a vial or a syringe with a needle. All preparations for parenteral administration must be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art. 8] Illustratively, intravenous or intraarterial infusion of a e aqueous solution containing an active compound is an effective mode of stration. Another ment is a sterile aqueous or oily solution or suspension containing an active material injected as necessary to produce the desired pharmacological effect. ables are designed for local and systemic administration. Typically a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain a concentration of at least about 0.1% w/w up to about 90% w/w or more, such as more than 1% w/w of the active compound to the treated tissue(s). The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be d into a number of r doses to be administered at intervals of time. It is understood that the e dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the tissue being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the age of the individual treated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the stration of the formulations, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the d formulations.

The compound may be suspended in micronized or other suitable form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble active product or to produce a prodrug. The form of the resulting e depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration WO 12777 and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the condition and may be empirically determined.

Lyophilized powders Of interest herein are also lyophilized s, which can be reconstituted for administration as solutions, emulsions and other mixtures. They may also be reconstituted and formulated as solids or gels.

The sterile, lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in a le solvent. The solvent may contain an excipient which improves the stability or other pharmacological ent of the powder or reconstituted solution, prepared from the powder. Excipients that may be used include, but are not limited to, dextrose, sorbital, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose or other suitable agent. The solvent may also contain a buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium ate or other such buffer known to those of skill in the art at, in one embodiment, about neutral pH. Subsequent sterile ion of the solution followed by lyophilization under standard conditions known to those of skill in the art provides the desired formulation. Generally, the resulting solution will be apportioned into vials for lyophilization. Each vial will contain a single dosage (including but not limited to 10-1000 mg or 100-500 mg) or multiple dosages of the compound. The lyophilized powder can be stored under appropriate conditions, such as at about 4 0C to room temperature. 3] Reconstitution of this lyophilized powder with water for injection provides a formulation for use in parenteral administration. For titution, about 1-50 mg, about 5-35 mg, or about 9-30 mg of lyophilized , is added per mL of sterile water or other suitable carrier.

The precise amount depends upon the selected nd. Such amount can be empirically determined.

Topical administration Topical es are prepared as described for the local and systemic administration.

The resulting e may be a solution, suspension, emulsion or the like and are formulated as creams, gels, nts, ons, ons, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, dermal patches or any other formulations suitable for topical administration.

] The compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts f may be formulated as aerosols for topical application, such as by inhalation (see, e.g., US. Patent Nos. 4,044,126, 4,414,209, and 4,364,923, which describe ls for delivery of a steroid useful for treatment of inflammatory diseases, particularly asthma). These formulations for administration to the respiratory tract can be in the form of an aerosol or solution for a nebulizer, or as a ne powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inert carrier such as e. In such a case, the particles of the formulation will have diameters of less than 50 microns or less than 10 The compounds may be formulated for local or topical ation, such as for topical application to the skin and mucous membranes, such as in the eye, in the form of gels, creams, and lotions and for application to the eye or for intracisternal or intraspinal application.

Topical administration is contemplated for transdermal delivery and also for administration to the eyes or mucosa, or for inhalation therapies. Nasal solutions of the active compound alone or in combination with other ceutically acceptable excipients can also be administered.

These solutions, particularly those intended for ophthalmic use, may be formulated as 0.01% - 10% isotonic solutions, pH about 5-7, with appropriate salts.

Compositions for other routes of administration Other routes of administration, such as l application, transdermal patches, and rectal administration are also contemplated herein.

For example, pharmaceutical dosage forms for rectal administration are rectal suppositories, capsules and s for systemic effect. Rectal suppositories are used herein mean solid bodies for insertion into the rectum which melt or soften at body temperature releasing one or more pharmacologically or therapeutically active ingredients. ceutically acceptable sub stances utilized in rectal suppositories are bases or vehicles and agents to raise the melting point. Examples of bases include cocoa butter (theobroma oil), glycerin gelatin, ax (polyoxyethylene glycol) and appropriate mixtures of mono, di and triglycerides of fatty acids.

Combinations of the various bases may be used. Agents to raise the melting point of suppositories include spermaceti and wax. Rectal suppositories may be prepared either by the compressed method or by g. An exemplary weight of a rectal suppository is about 2 to 3 grams.

Tablets and capsules for rectal administration are manufactured using the same pharmaceutically able substance and by the same methods as for ations for oral administration.

Sustained Release Compositions Active ingredients provided herein can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ry skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in US. Patent Nos: 3,845,770, 3,916,899, 3,536,809, 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, ,354,556, 5,639,480, 5,733,566, 5,739,108, 5,891,474, 5,922,356, 5,972,891, 945, ,993,855, 6,045,830, 6,087,324, 6,113,943, 6,197,350, 6,248,363, 6,264,970, 6,267,981, 461,6,419,961, 6,589,548, 6,613,358, 6,699,500 and 634, each h is incorporated herein by reference. Such dosage forms can be used to e slow or controlled- release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer gs, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the d release profile in varying proportions. Suitable controlled-release ations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients provided herein, All controlled-release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non—controlled counterparts. In one embodiment, the use of an optimally designed controlled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time. In certain embodiments, advantages of controlled-release formulations include extended activity of the drug, d dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance. In addition, controlled-release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other teristics, such as blood levels of the drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.

Most controlled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug e ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and ually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being lized and excreted from the body. Controlled—release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.

In certain embodiments, the agent may be administered using intravenous infusion, an table c pump, a transdermal patch, mes, or other modes of administration. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see, Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987), Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989). In another embodiment, ric materials can be used. In yet another embodiment, a controlled e system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, Medical Applications of Controlled Release, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984) In some embodiments, a lled release device is introduced into a subject in proximity of the site of opriate immune activation or a tumor. Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990). The active ingredient can be dispersed in a solid inner matrix, e.g., polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene-vinylacetate copolymers, ne rubbers, methylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hydrophilic polymers such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, linked polyvinylalcohol and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, that is surrounded by an outer polymeric membrane, e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ne/ethyl acrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethyl siloxanes, neoprene rubber, chlorinated polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, vinylchloride mers with vinyl acetate, vinylidene chloride, ethylene and propylene, ionomer polyethylene terephthalate, butyl rubber epichlorohydrin rubbers, ethylene/vinyl alcohol copolymer, ethylene/vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol terpolymer, and ne/vinyloxyethanol copolymer, that is insoluble in body fluids. The active ingredient then diffuses through the outer ric ne in a release rate controlling step. The percentage of active ingredient contained in such parenteral compositions is highly ent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the needs of the subject.

Targeted Formulations The compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, may also be formulated to be targeted to a particular tissue, receptor, or other area of the body of the subject to be treated, including liposome-, resealed erythrocyte-, and antibody-based delivery systems. Many such targeting methods are well known to those of skill in the art. All such ing methods are contemplated herein for use in the instant compositions. For non-limiting examples of targeting methods, see, e.g., US. Patent Nos. 6,316,652, 6,274,552, 6,271,359, 6,253,872, 6,139,865, 6,131,570, 751, 6,071,495, 6,060,082, 6,048,736, 6,039,975, 6,004,534, 5,985,307, 5,972,366, 5,900,252, 5,840,674, 5,759,542 and 874.

In one embodiment, the antibody-based delivery system is an antibody-drug conjugate (“ADC”), e.g., as described in Hamilton GS, Biologicals, 2015 Sep, 43(5):318-32, Kim EG and Kim KM, Biomol. Ther. (Seoul), 2015 Nov., 23(6):493-509; and Peters C and Brown S, Biosci. Rep, 2015 Jun 12, 35(4) pii: e00225, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.

In one embodiment, liposomal suspensions, including tissue-targeted liposomes, such as tumor-targeted liposomes, may also be suitable as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.

These may be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art. For e, liposome formulations may be prepared as described in US. Patent No. 4,522,811. , liposomes such as multilamellar vesicles (MLV's) may be formed by drying down egg atidyl choline and brain phosphatidyl serine (7:3 molar ratio) on the inside of a flask. A solution of a compound provided herein in phosphate buffered saline lacking divalent s (PB S) is added and the flask shaken until the lipid film is dispersed. The ing vesicles are washed to remove unencapsulated compound, pelleted by centrifugation, and then resuspended in PBS.

Articles of Manufacture The compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof ed herein, which is used for treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms or progression of a disease or disorder sed , and a label that indicates that the compound or ceutically able salt thereof is used for ent, tion or amelioration of one or more symptoms or progression of a disease or er disclosed herein.

The articles of manufacture provided herein contain ing materials. Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are well known to those of skill in the art.

See, e.g., US. Patent Nos. 5,323,907, 5,052,558 and 5,033,252. Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, pens, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment. A wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions provided herein are contemplated.

In certain embodiments, ed herein also are kits which, when used by the medical practitioner, can simplify the administration of appropriate amounts of active ients to a subject. In n embodiments, the kit provided herein includes a ner and a dosage form of a compound provided herein, including a single enantiomer or a mixture of diastereomers thereof; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof.

In n embodiments, the kit includes a container comprising a dosage form of the compound provided herein, including a single enantiomer or a mixture of diastereomers thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or prodrug thereof, in a ner comprising one or more other therapeutic agent(s) described herein. 3] Kits provided herein can further include devices that are used to administer the active ingredients. Examples of such devices include, but are not limited to, syringes, needle-less injectors drip bags, s, and inhalers. The kits provided herein can also include condoms for administration of the active ingredients.

Kits ed herein can further include pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles that can be used to administer one or more active ients. For example, if an active ient is provided in a solid form that must be reconstituted for eral administration, the kit can comprise a sealed container of a suitable vehicle in which the active ingredient can be dissolved to form a particulate-free sterile solution that is le for parenteral administration. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles include, but are not limited to: aqueous vehicles, including, but not limited to, Water for Injection USP, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer’s Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium de Injection, and Lactated ’s Injection; water—miscible vehicles, including, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and opylene glycol; and non-aqueous es, including, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate. 7. METHODS OF TREATMENT 7.1 Cancer In one embodiment, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing cancer, which comprises administering to a t a compound provided herein, or a derivative f.

In r embodiment, provided herein is method of managing cancer, which comprises administering to a t a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof.

Also provided herein are s of treating ts who have been previously treated for cancer but are non-responsive to rd therapies, as well as those who have not previously been treated. Also provided are methods of treating patients regardless of patient’s age, although some diseases or disorders are more common in certain age groups. Also ed are methods of ng patients who have undergone surgery in an attempt to treat the disease or condition at issue, as well as those who have not. Because patients with cancer have geneous clinical manifestations and varying clinical outcomes, the treatment given to a patient may vary, depending on his/her prognosis. The skilled clinician will be able to readily determine without undue experimentation c secondary agents, types of surgery, and types of non-drug based standard therapy that can be effectively used to treat an individual patient with cancer.

As used herein, the term “cancer” includes, but is not limited to, solid tumors and blood borne tumors. The term “cancer” refers to disease of skin tissues, organs, blood, and s, including, but not limited to, cancers of the bladder, bone, blood, brain, , cervix, chest, colon, endrometrium, gus, eye, head, kidney, liver, lymph nodes, lung, mouth, neck, ovaries, pancreas, prostate, rectum, stomach, testis, throat, and uterus. Specific cancers include, but are not limited to, ed malignancy, amyloidosis, neuroblastoma, meningioma, hemangiopericytoma, multiple brain metastase, glioblastoma multiforms, glioblastoma, brain stem glioma, poor prognosis malignant brain tumor, malignant glioma, recurrent malignant giolma, anaplastic astrocytoma, anaplastic oligodendroglioma, neuroendocrine tumor, rectal adenocarcinoma, Dukes C & D colorectal cancer, unresectable colorectal oma, metastatic hepatocellular carcinoma, Kaposi’s sarcoma, pe acute myeloblastic leukemia, Hodgkin’s lymphoma, non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma, cutaneous T-Cell lymphoma, cutaneous B-Cell lymphoma, diffuse large B-Cell ma, low grade follicular lymphoma, malignant melanoma, malignant mesothelioma, malignant pleural effusion mesothelioma syndrome, peritoneal carcinoma, papillary serous oma, gynecologic sarcoma, soft tissue sarcoma, scleroderma, cutaneous vasculitis, Langerhans cell histiocytosis, leiomyosarcoma, fibrodysplasia ans ssive, hormone refractory prostate cancer, resected high-risk soft tissue sarcoma, unrescectable hepatocellular carcinoma, Waldenstrom’ s macroglobulinemia, smoldering myeloma, indolent myeloma, fallopian tube cancer, androgen independent prostate cancer, androgen dependent stage IV non-metastatic prostate cancer, hormone-insensitive te cancer, chemotherapy-insensitive prostate cancer, papillary thyroid carcinoma, follicular d carcinoma, medullary thyroid carcinoma, and leiomyoma In certain embodiments, the cancer is a solid tumor. In certain embodiments, the solid tumor is metastatic. In certain ments, the solid tumor is drug-resistant. In certain ments, the solid tumor is hepatocellular oma, prostate , pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, or glioblastoma.

In certain embodiments, the cancer is a blood borne tumor. In certain embodiments, the blood borne tumor is metastatic. In certain ments, the blood borne tumor is drug resistant. In certain embodiments, the cancer is leukemia.

In one embodiment, methods provided herein encompass treating, preventing or managing various types of leukemias such as chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), chronic myelocytic ia (CML), acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), acute myeloid leukemia (AML), and acute myeloblastic leukemia (AML) by administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound provided herein or a derivative thereof. 2] In some ments, the methods provided herein encompass treating, preventing or managing acute leukemia in a subject. In some embodiments, the acute leukemia is acute myeloid ia (AML), which includes, but is not limited to, undifferentiated AML (M0), myeloblastic leukemia (M1), myeloblastic leukemia (M2), promyelocytic leukemia (M3 or M3 variant [M3V]), myelomonocytic leukemia (M4 or M4 variant with eosinophilia [M4E]), tic leukemia (M5), erythroleukemia (M6), and megakaryoblastic leukemia (M7). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid leukemia is undifferentiated AML (MO). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid leukemia is myeloblastic leukemia (Ml). In one embodiment, the acute d leukemia is myeloblastic leukemia (M2). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid leukemia is promyelocytic leukemia (M3 or M3 t [M3V]). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid leukemia is myelomonocytic leukemia (M4 or M4 variant with eosinophilia [M4E]). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid leukemia is monocytic leukemia (M5). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid ia is erythroleukemia (M6). In one embodiment, the acute myeloid leukemia WO 12777 is megakaryoblastic leukemia (M7). Thus, the s of treating, preventing or managing acute myeloid leukemia in a subject comprise the step of administering to the subject an amount of a compound provided herein or a tive thereof ive to treat, prevent or manage acute myeloid leukemia alone or in combination, In some embodiments, the methods comprise the step of administering to the subject a compound provided herein or a derivative thereof in combination with a second active agent in amounts ive to treat, prevent or manage acute myeloid leukemia.

In some embodiments, the methods provided herein encompass ng, preventing or managing acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) in a subject. In some embodiments, acute lymphocytic leukemia includes leukemia that originates in the blast cells of the bone marrow (B- cells), thymus (T-cells), and lymph nodes. The acute lymphocytic leukemia can be categorized according to the French-American-British (FAB) Morphological Classification Scheme as Ll - Mature-appearing lymphoblasts (T cells or pre-B-cells), L2 - Immature and pleomorphic (variously shaped) lymphoblasts (T-cells or cells), and L3 — Lymphoblasts (B-cells; Burkitt's cells). In one embodiment, the acute cytic leukemia originates in the blast cells of the bone marrow (B-cells). In one embodiment, the acute lymphocytic leukemia originates in the thymus (T-cells).

In one embodiment, the acute lymphocytic leukemia originates in the lymph nodes. In one embodiment, the acute lymphocytic leukemia is Ll type characterized by mature-appearing lymphoblasts (T-cells or pre-B-cells). In one embodiment, the acute lymphocytic leukemia is L2 type terized by re and pleomorphic (variously shaped) blasts (T-cells or pre- B-cells). In one embodiment, the acute lymphocytic leukemia is L3 type characterized by lymphoblasts ls; Burkitt's cells). In certain embodiments, the acute lymphocytic leukemia is T cell leukemia. In one embodiment, the T-cell leukemia is peripheral T-cell leukemia. In another embodiment, the T-cell leukemia is T-cell blastic leukemia. In another embodiment, the T- cell leukemia is cutaneous T—cell leukemia. In another embodiment, the T—cell leukemia is adult T- cell leukemia.Thus, the methods of treating, preventing or managing acute lymphocytic leukemia in a subject comprise the step of administering to the t an amount of a compound provided herein or a derivative thereof effective to treat, prevent or manage acute cytic leukemia alone or in combination with a second active agent. In some ments, the methods comprise the step of administering to the t a compound provided herein or a derivative thereof in combination with a second active agent in amounts effective to treat, prevent or manage acute lymphocytic leukemia.

In some embodiments, the methods provided herein encompass treating, preventing or managing chronic myelogenous ia (CML) in a subject. The methods comprise the step of administering to the subject an amount of a compound provided herein or a derivative thereof effective to treat, t or manage chronic myelogenous leukemia. In some embodiments, the methods comprise the step of administering to the subject a compound provided herein or a tive thereof in combination with a second active agent in s effective to treat, prevent or manage chronic myelogenous leukemia.

In some embodiments, the methods provided herein encompass treating, preventing or ng chronic cytic leukemia (CLL) in a subject. The methods comprise the step of administering to the t an amount of a compound provided herein or a derivative thereof effective to treat, prevent or manage chronic lymphocytic leukemia. In some embodiments, the methods comprise the step of administering to the subject a compound ed herein or a derivative thereof in combination With a second active agent in amounts effective to treat, prevent or manage chronic lymphocytic leukemia.

In certain embodiments, provided herein are methods of treating, preventing, and/or managing disease in patients with impaired renal function. In certain embodiments, provided herein are method of treating, preventing, and/or managing cancer in ts with impaired renal function. In certain embodiments, provided herein are methods of providing appropriate dose adjustments for ts with impaired renal function due to, but not limited to, disease, aging, or other patient factors.

In certain embodiments, provided herein are methods of treating, preventing, and/or managing lymphoma, including non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma. In some embodiments, ed herein are methods for the treatment or ment of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL), including but not limited to, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma (DLBCL), using prognostic factors.

In certain embodiments, ed herein are methods of treating, ting, and/or managing multiple myeloma, including relapsed/refractory le a in ts with impaired renal function or a symptom f, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof to a patient having relapsed/refractory multiple myeloma with impaired renal function.

In certain embodiments, a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of the compound is from about 0.005 to about 1,000 mg per day, from about 0.01 to about 500 mg per 2016/068032 day, from about 0.01 to about 250 mg per day, from about 0.01 to about 100 mg per day, from about 0.1 to about 100 mg per day, from about 0.5 to about 100 mg per day, from about 1 to about 100 mg per day, from about 0.01 to about 50 mg per day, from about 0.1 to about 50 mg per day, from about 0.5 to about 50 mg per day, from about 1 to about 50 mg per day, from about 0.02 to about 25 mg per day, from about 0.05 to about 10 mg per day, from about 0.05 to about 5 mg per day, from about 0.1 to about 5 mg per day, or from about 0.5 to about 5 mg per day.

In certain ments, the therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount is about 01, about 0.2, about 0.5, about 1, about 2, about 3, about 4, about 5, about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, about 10, about 15, about 20, about 25, about 30, about 40, about 45, about 50, about 60, about 70, about 80, about 90, about 100, or about 150 mg per day.

In one ment, the recommended daily dose range of the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.5 mg to about 50 mg per day, in one embodiment given as a single once-a—day dose, or in divided doses throughout a day. In some embodiments, the dosage ranges from about 1 mg to about 50 mg per day. In other embodiments, the dosage ranges from about 0.5 to about 5 mg per day. Specific doses per day include 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,23, 24,25, 26,27, 28,29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49 or 50 mg per day, In a specific embodiment, the recommended starting dosage may be 0.5, l, 2, 3, 4, 5, , 15, 20, 25 or 50 mg per day. In another embodiment, the recommended ng dosage may be 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 mg per day. The dose may be escalated to 15, 20, 25, 30, 35,40, 45 and 50 mg/day. In a specific embodiment, the compound can be administered in an amount of about 25 mg/day. In a particular embodiment, the compound can be administered in an amount of about 10 mg/day. In a particular embodiment, the compound can be administered in an amount of about 5 mg/day. In a particular embodiment, the compound can be administered in an amount of about 4 mg/day. In a particular embodiment, the compound can be administered in an amount of about 3 mg/day.

In certain ments, the therapeutically or prophylactically ive amount is from about 0.001 to about 100 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 50 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 10 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 9 mg/kg/day, 0.01 to about 8 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 7 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to 2016/068032 about 6 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 5 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 4 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 3 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 2 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 1 mg/kg/day, or from about 0.01 to about 0.05 mg/kg/day.

The administered dose can also be expressed in units other than day. For example, doses for parenteral administration can be expressed as mg/mZ/day. One of ordinary skill in the art would y know how to convert doses from mg/kg/day to mg/mZ/day to given either the height or weight of a subject or both (see, www.fda.gov/cder/cancer/animalframe.htm). For example, a dose of 1 mg/kg/day for a 65 kg human is approximately equal to 38 mg/mz/day.

In certain embodiments, the amount of the compound administered is sufficient to provide a plasma concentration of the compound at steady state, ranging from about 0.001 to about 500 nM, about 0.002 to about 200 uM, about 0.005 to about 100 uM, about 0.01 to about 50 uM, from about 1 to about 50 uM, about 0.02 to about 25 M, from about 0.05 to about 20 M, from about 0.1 to about 20 uM, from about 0.5 to about 20 uM, or from about 1 to about 20 uM.

In other embodiments, the amount of the nd administered is ent to provide a plasma concentration of the compound at steady state, ranging from about 5 to about 100 nM, about 5 to about 50 nM, about 10 to about 100 nM, about 10 to about 50 nM or from about 50 to about 100 nM.

As used herein, the term “plasma concentration at steady state” is the concentration reached after a period of administration of a compound provided , or a derivative thereof.

Once steady state is reached, there are minor peaks and troughs on the time dependent curve of the plasma concentration of the nd.

In certain embodiments, the amount of the compound administered is sufficient to provide a maximum plasma concentration (peak concentration) of the compound, ranging from about 0.001 to about 500 uM, about 0.002 to about 200 uM, about 0.005 to about 100 M, about 0.01 to about 50 M, from about 1 to about 50 uM, about 0.02 to about 25 uM, from about 0.05 to about 20 uM, from about 0.1 to about 20 uM, from about 0.5 to about 20 uM,or from about 1 to about 20 M.

In certain embodiments, the amount of the compound administered is sufficient to provide a minimum plasma tration (trough concentration) of the compound, ranging from about 0.001 to about 500 uM, about 0.002 to about 200 uM, about 0.005 to about 100 M, about 0.01 to about 50 M, from about 1 to about 50 nM, about 0.01 to about 25 uM, from about 0.01 to about 20 uM, from about 0.02 to about 20 uM, from about 0.02 to about 20 uM, or from about 0.01 to about 20 M.

In certain embodiments, the amount of the compound administered is sufficient to provide an area under the curve (AUC) of the nd, ranging from about 100 to about 100,000 mL, from about 1,000 to about 50,000 mL, from about 5,000 to about 25,000 ng*hr/mL, or from about 5,000 to about 10,000 ng*hr/mL.

In certain embodiments, the t to be treated with one of the methods ed herein has not been treated with anticancer therapy prior to the administration of the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof. In certain embodiments, the patient to be treated with one of the methods provided herein has been d with anticancer therapy prior to the administration of the compound ed herin, or a derivative thereof. In certain embodiments, the patient to be treated with one of the methods provided herein has developed drug resistance to the anticancer therapy.

The methods provided herein encompass treating a patient regardless of patient’s age, although some diseases or disorders are more common in certain age groups.

Depending on the disease to be treated and the subject’s condition, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, may be administered by oral, eral (e.g., intramuscular, eritoneal, intravenous, CIV, istemal injection or infusion, subcutaneous injection, or t), inhalation, nasal, vaginal, rectal, sublingual, or topical (e. g., transdermal or local) routes of administration. The compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, may be formulated, alone or together, in suitable dosage unit with pharrnaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, adjuvants and vehicles, appropriate for each route of stration.

In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered orally. In another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is stered parenterally. In yet another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative f, is administered intravenously.

The compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, can be delivered as a single dose such as, e.g., a single bolus injection, or oral s or pills, or over time, such as, e. g., continuous infusion over time or divided bolus doses over time The compound can be stered repeatedly if necessary, for example, until the patient experiences stable disease or regression, or until the patient experiences disease progression or unacceptable toxicity. For WO 12777 example, stable disease for solid tumors generally means that the dicular diameter of measurable lesions has not increased by 25% or more from the last measurement. Response Evaluation ia in Solid Tumors (RECIST) Guidelines, Journal of the National Cancer Institute 92(3): 205 216 (2000). Stable disease or lack thereof is determined by methods known in the art such as evaluation of patient symptoms, al examination, visualization of the tumor that has been imaged using X—ray, CAT, PET, or MRI scan and other commonly accepted evaluation modalities.

The nd provided herein, or a derivative thereof, can be administered once daily (QD), or divided into multiple daily doses such as twice daily (BID), three times daily (TID), and four times daily (QID). In addition, the administration can be continuous (i.e., daily for consecutive days or every day), intermittent, e.g., in cycles (i.e., ing days, weeks, or months of rest without drug). As used herein, the term “daily” is intended to mean that a therapeutic compound, such as the compound provided herein, or a delivative thereof, is administered once or more than once each day, for example, for a period of time. The term “continuous” is intended to mean that a eutic compound, such as the compound provided herein or a derivative thereof, is administered daily for an uninterrupted period of at least 10 days to 52 weeks. The term “intermittent” or “intermittently” as used herein is intended to mean stopping and starting at either r or irregular intervals. For example, intermittent administration of the compound provided herein or a derivative thereof is administration for one to six days per week, administration in cycles (e. g,, daily administration for two to eight utive weeks, then a rest period with no stration for up to one week), or administration on alternate days. The term “cycling” as used herein is intended to mean that a therapeutic compound, such as the compound provided herein or a derivative thereof, is administered daily or continuously but with a rest period. In some such ments, administration is once a day for two to six days, then a rest period with no administration for five to seven days.

In some embodiments, the frequency of administration is in the range of about a daily dose to about a monthly dose. In certain embodiments, stration is once a day, twice a day, three times a day, four times a day, once every other day, twice a week, once every week, once every two weeks, once every three weeks, or once every four weeks. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once a day. In another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered twice a day.

In yet r embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative f, is administered three times a day. In still another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered four times a day. 8] In certain embodiments, the nd ed herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once per day from one day to six months, from one week to three months, from one week to four weeks, from one week to three weeks, or from one week to two weeks. In certain embodiments, the compound provided , or a derivative thereof, is stered once per day for one week, two weeks, three weeks, or four weeks. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once per day for 4 days. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once per day for 5 days. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, is administered once per day for 6 days. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once per day for one week. In another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once per day for two weeks. In yet r embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, is stered once per day for three weeks.

In still another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered once per day for four weeks.

Combination Therapy With A Second Active Agent The compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, can also be combined or used in combination with other therapeutic agents useful in the treatment and/or prevention of cancer described herein.

In one embodiment, provided herein is a method of treating, preventing, or managing cancer, comprising administering to a patient a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, in combination with one or more second active agents, and optionally in combination with radiation therapy, blood transfusions, or surgery. Examples of second active agents are disclosed herein.

As used herein, the term “in combination” es the use of more than one therapy (e. g., one or more prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents). However, the use of the term “in combination” does not restrict the order in which therapies (e. g., prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents) are administered to a patient with a e or disorder. A first therapy (e. g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent such as a compound provided herein, a nd provided herein, e.g, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof) can be administered prior to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the stration of a second therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) to the subject. Triple therapy is also contemplated herein.

Administration of the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof and one or more second active agents to a patient can occur aneously or sequentially by the same or different routes of administration. The ility of a particular route of administration employed for a particular active agent will depend on the active agent itself (e.g., r it can be administered orally without osing prior to entering the blood stream) and the cancer being treated.

The route of administration of the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is independent of the route of administration of a second therapy. In one embodiment, the nd provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered orally. In r ment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered intravenously. Thus, in accordance with these embodiments, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered orally or intravenously, and the second y can be administered orally, erally, intraperitoneally, intravenously, intraarterially, transdermally, sublingually, intramuscularly, ly, transbuccally, intranasally, liposomally, via inhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly, via local ry by catheter or stent, subcutaneously, intraadiposally, intraarticularly, intrathecally, or in a slow release dosage form. In one embodiment, the compound provided , or a derivative thereof, and a second therapy are stered by the same mode of administration, orally or by IV. In another embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered by one mode of administration, e.g., by IV, whereas the second agent (an anticancer agent) is administered by another mode of administration, e. g., orally.

In one embodiment, the second active agent is administered intravenously or subcutaneously and once or twice daily in an amount of from about 1 to about 1000 mg, from about to about 500 mg, from about 10 to about 350 mg, or from about 50 to about 200 mg. The specific amount of the second active agent will depend on the specific agent used, the type of disease being treated or managed, the severity and stage of disease, and the amount of the compound provided , or a derivative thereof, and any optional additional active agents concurrently administered to the patient.

One or more second active ingredients or agents can be used together with the compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, in the s and compositions provided herein. Second active agents can be large molecules (e.g., proteins) or small molecules (e.g., synthetic inorganic, organometallic, or organic molecules). 6] Examples of large molecule active agents include, but are not limited to, hematopoietic growth s, cytokines, and monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies, particularly, therapeutic antibodies to cancer antigens. Typical large molecule active agents are biological les, such as naturally occurring or synthetic or inant proteins. Proteins that are particularly useful in the methods and compositions provided herein e proteins that stimulate the survival and/or proliferation of hematopoietic precursor cells and immunologically active poietic cells in vitro or in vivo. Other useful proteins stimulate the division and differentiation of committed erythroid progenitors in cells in vitro or in vivo. Particular proteins include, but are not d to: interleukins, such as IL—2 (including recombinant IL-II (“rILZ”) and canarypox IL-2), IL-10, IL-12, and IL-18, interferons, such as eron a, interferon alfa-2b, interferon alfa- nl, interferon alfa-n3, interferon beta-I a, and interferon gamma-1b; GM-CF and GM-C SF; and EPO.

In certain embodiments, GM-CSF, G—CSF, SCF or EPO is administered subcutaneously during about five days in a four or six week cycle in an amount ranging from about 1 to about 750 day, from about 25 to about 500 mg/mz/day, from about 50 to about 250 mg/m2/day, or from about 50 to about 200 mg/mZ/day. In certain embodiments, GM-CSF may be administered in an amount of from about 60 to about 500 mcg/m2 intravenously over 2 hours or from about 5 to about 12 mcg/mz/day subcutaneously. In certain embodiments, G—CSF may be stered subcutaneously in an amount of about 1 mcg/kg/day initially and can be adjusted depending on rise of total granulocyte counts. The maintenance dose of G—CSF may be administered in an amount of about 300 (in smaller patients) or 480 mcg subcutaneously. In certain embodiments, EPO may be administered subcutaneously in an amount of 10,000 Unit 3 times per week.

Particular proteins that can be used in the methods and compositions include, but are not limited to: stim, which is sold in the United States under the trade name Neupogen® (Amgen, Thousand Oaks, CA); sargramostim, which is sold in the United States under the trade name Leukine® (Immunex, Seattle, WA), and recombinant EPO, which is sold in the United States under the trade name Epogen® (Amgen, Thousand Oaks, CA).

Recombinant and mutated forms of GM—CSF can be prepared as described in US. patent nos. 5,391,485; 5,393,870, and 496, all of which are orated herein by reference.

Recombinant and mutated forms of G—C SF can be prepared as described in US. patent nos. 4,810,643, 4,999,291; 5,528,823, and 5,580,755, the entireties of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Also provided for use in combination with a compound provided herein, or a derivative f, of are native, lly occurring, and recombinant proteins. Further encompassed are mutants and derivatives (e.g., modified forms) of naturally ing proteins that t, in vivo, at least some of the pharmacological activity of the proteins upon which they are based. Examples of mutants include, but are not limited to, proteins that have one or more amino acid residues that differ from the corresponding residues in the naturally occurring forms of the proteins. Also encompassed by the term “mutants” are proteins that lack carbohydrate moieties normally t in their naturally occurring forms (e. g., cosylated forms). Examples of derivatives include, but are not d to, pegylated derivatives and fusion proteins, such as ns formed by fusing IgGl or IgG3 to the protein or active portion of the protein of interest.

See, e.g., Penichet, ML. and Morrison, S.L., J. Immunol. Methods 248:91-101 (2001). 1] Antibodies that can be used in combination with a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, include monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies. Examples of antibodies include, but are not limited to, trastuzumab (Herceptin®), rituximab (Rituxan®), bevacizumab (AvastinTM), pertuzumab argTM), tositumomab (Bexxar®), edrecolomab (Panorex®), and G250. The compounds ed herein or an enantiomer or a mixture of enantiomers thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, co—crystal, clathrate, or polymorph thereof can also be combined with, or used in combination with, anti-TNF-d antibodies, and/or anti-EGFR antibodies, such as, for example, Erbitux® or panitumumab.

Large molecule active agents may be administered in the form of anti-cancer vaccines. For example, es that secrete, or cause the secretion of, cytokines such as IL-2, G- CSF, and GM-CSF can be used in the methods and pharmaceutical compositions ed. See, e.g., Emens, L.A., et al., Curr. Opinion Mol. Ther. 3(1):77-84 (2001).

Second active agents that are small molecules can also be used to alleviate adverse s associated with the administration of a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof.

However, like some large molecules, many are believed to be capable of providing a synergistic effect when administered with (e.g., before, after or aneously) a compound provided , or a derivative thereof. Examples of small molecule second active agents include, but are not d to, anti-cancer agents, antibiotics, immunosuppressive agents, and steroids.

In certain embodiments, the second agent is an HSP inhibitor, a proteasome inhibitor, a FLT3 inhibitior or a TOR kinase inhibitor.

Examples of anti-cancer agents to be used Within the methods or compositions described herein include, but are not limited to: acivicin; aclarubicin; acodazole hydrochloride; acronine; esin; aldesleukin; altretamine; ambomycin; ametantrone acetate; amsacrine; anastrozole; mycin; asparaginase; asperlin; azacitidine; azetepa; azotomycin; batimastat; benzodepa; bicalutamide; rene hlon'de; bisnafide dimesylate; bizelesin; bleomycin e; brequinar sodium; bropirimine; busulfan; cactinomycin; calusterone; caracemide; carbetimer; carboplatin; carmustine; carubicin hydrochloride; carzelesin; ngol; celecoxib (COX—2 inhibitor); mbucil; mycin; cisplatin; cladribine; clofarabine; crisnatol mesylate; cyclophosphamide; Ara-C; dacarbazine; dactinomycin; daunorubicin hydrochloride; decitabine; dexormaplatin; anine; dezaguanine mesylate; diaziquone; docetaxel; doxorubicin; doxorubicin hydrochloride; droloxifene; droloxifene e; dromostanolone propionate; duazomycin; edatrexate; eflornithine hydrochloride; elsamitrucin; enloplatin; enpromate; epipropidine; epirubicin hloride; erbulozole; esorubicin hydrochloride; ustine; estramustine phosphate sodium; etanidazole; ide; etoposide phosphate; etoprine; ole hydrochloride; fazarabine; fenretinide; floxuridine; fludarabine phosphate; fluorouracil; flurocitabine; fosquidone; fostriecin sodium; gemcitabine; gemcitabine hydrochloride; hydroxyurea; idarubicin hydrochloride; ifosfamide; ilmofosine; iproplatin; irinotecan; irinotecan hydrochloride; lanreotide acetate; letrozole; leuprolide acetate; liarozole hydrochloride; lometrexol sodium; lomustine; losoxantrone hydrochlofide; masoprocol; maytansine; mechlorethamine hydrochloride; megestrol e; melengestrol acetate; melphalan; menogaril; mercaptopurine; methotrexate; methotrexate sodium; metoprine; meturedepa; mitindomide; mitocarcin; mitocromin; mitogillin; mitomalcin; mitomycin; mitosper; mitotane; mitoxantrone hydrochloride; mycophenolic acid; zole; nogalamycin; omacetaXine; ormaplatin; oxisuran; paclitaxel; pegaspargase; peliomycin; pentamustine; peplomycin sulfate; perfosfamide; pipobroman; piposulfan; ntrone hydrochloride; plicamycin; tane; porflmer ; porfiromycin; prednimustine; procarbazine hydrochloride; puromycin; puromycin hydrochloride; pyrazofurin; ine; l; safmgol hloride; semustine; simtrazene; sorafenib; sparfosate sodium; sparsomycin; spirogermanium hloride; spiromustine; spiroplatin; streptonigrin; streptozocin; sulofenur; talisomycin; tecogalan ; taxotere; tegafur; teloxantrone hydrochloride; temoporfm; side; teroxirone; testolactone; thiamiprine; thioguanine; thiotepa; tiazofurin; tirapazamine; toremifene citrate; trestolone acetate; triciribine ate; trimetrexate; trimetrexate glucuronate; triptorelin; zole hydrochloride; uracil mustard; uredepa; vapreotide; verteporfm; Vinblastine sulfate; Vincristine e; Vindesine; vindesine sulfate; Vinepidine sulfate; vinglycinate sulfate; Vinleurosine sulfate; Vinorelbine tartrate; Vinrosidine sulfate; Vinzolidine sulfate; vorozole; zeniplatin; zinostatin; and zorubicin hydrochloride. 6] Other anti-cancer drugs to be included within the methods or itions include; but are not limited to: 20-epi—l;25 dihydroxyvitamin D3; 5-ethynyluracil; abiraterone; aclarubicin; acylfulvene; enol; adozelesin; eukin; ALL-TK antagonists; altretamine; ambamustine; amidox; amifostine; aminolevulinic acid; amrubicin; amsacrine; anagrelide; anastrozole; andrographolide; angiogenesis inhibitors; antagonist D; antagonist G; antarelix; anti-dorsalizing morphogenetic protein—1; antiandrogen; prostatic carcinoma; antiestrogen; antineoplaston; antisense oligonucleotides; aphidicolin glycinate; apoptosis gene modulators; apoptosis regulators; apurinic acid; ara-CDP-DL-PTBA; arginine ase; asulacrine; atamestane; atrimustine; axinastatin 1; aXinastatin 2; aXinastatin 3; azasetron; azatoxin; osine; baccatin III derivatives; balanol; batimastat; BCR/ABL antagonists; hlorins; benzoylstaurosporine; beta lactam derivatives; beta-alethine; betaclamycin B; betulinic acid; bFGF inhibitor; tamide; bisantrene; bisaziridinylspermine; bisnafide; bistratene A; bizelesin; breflate; bropirimine; budotitane; buthionine imine; calcipotriol; calphostin C; camptothecin derivatives; capecitabine; carboxamide-amino-triazole; carboxyamidotriazole; CaRest M3; CARN 700; cartilage derived inhibitor; carzelesin; casein kinase inhibitors (ICOS); castanospermine; cecropin B; cetrorelix; chlorlns; chloroquinoxaline sulfonamide; cicaprost; cis-porphyrin; cladribine; clomifene analogues; clotrimazole; collismycin A; collismycin B; combretastatin A4; combretastatin analogue; conagenin; crambescidin 816; tol; cryptophycin 8; cryptophycin A derivatives; curacin A; cyclopentanthraquinones; cycloplatam; cypemycin; Ara-C ocfosfate; cytolytic factor; cytostatin; dacliximab; bine; dehydrodidemnin B; elin; dexamethasone; dexifosfamide; dexrazoxane; dexverapamil; diaziquone; didemnin B; didox; diethylnorspermine; dihydro-S- azacytidine; dihydrotaxol; 9-; dioxamycin; yl spiromustine; docetaxel; docosanol; dolasetron; doxifluridine; doxorubicin; droloxifene; dronabinol; duocarmycin SA; ebselen; ecomustine; edelfosine; lomab; eflornithine; elemene; emitefur; epirubicin; epristeride; ustine ue; estrogen ts; estrogen antagonists; etanidazole; ide phosphate; exemestane; fadrozole; fazarabine; fenretinide; fllgrastim; eride; flavopiridol; flezelastine; fluasterone; fludarabine; fluorodaunorunicin hydrochloride; forfenimex; formestane; fostriecin; fotemustine; gadolinium texaphyrin; gallium e; galocitabine; ganirelix; gelatinase inhibitors; gemcitabine; glutathione inhibitors; hepsulfam; heregulin; hexamethylene bisacetamide; hypericin; ibandronic acid; idarubicin; idoxifene; idramantone; sine; tat; imatinib (e.g., Gleevec®); imiquimod; immunostimulant peptides; insulin-like growth factor-1 receptor inhibitor; interferon agonists; interferons; interleukins; iobenguane; iododoxorubicin; ipomeanol; 4-; iroplact; irsogladine; isobengazole; ohalicondrin B; itasetron; jasplakinolide; kahalalide F; lamellarin-N triacetate; lanreotide; leinamycin; lenograstim; lentinan sulfate; statin; letrozole; leukemia inhibiting factor; leukocyte alpha interferon; leuprolide+estrogen+progesterone; leuprorelin; levamisole; liarozole; linear polyamine analogue; lipophilic disaccharide peptide; lipophilic platinum compounds; lissoclinamide 7; lobaplatin; lombricine; lometrexol; lonidamine; losoxantrone; loxoribine; lurtotecan; lutetium texaphyrin; lline; lytic peptides; maitansine; mannostatin A; marimastat; masoprocol; ; matrilysin inhibitors; matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors; menogaril; merbarone; meterelin; methioninase; metoclopramide; MIF inhibitor; mifepristone; miltefosine; mirimostim; mitoguazone; mitolactol; mitomycin analogues; mitonaflde; mitotoxin fibroblast growth factor-saporin; mitoxantrone; mofarotene; molgramostim; Erbitux; human chorionic trophin; monophosphoryl lipid A+myobacterium cell wall sk; mopidamol; mustard anticancer agent; mycaperoxide B; mycobacterial cell wall extract; myriaporone; N— acetyldinaline; N—substituted benzamides; nafarelin; nagrestip; naloxone+pentazocine; napaVin; naphterpin; nartograstim; nedaplatin; nemorubicin; neridronic acid; mide; nisamycin; nitric oxide modulators; nitroxide antioxidant; nitrullyn; rsen (Genasense®); O6 benzylguanine; octreotide; okicenone; oligonucleotides; onapristone; ondansetron; ondansetron; oracin; oral cytokine r; ormaplatin; osaterone; oxaliplatin; oxaunomycin; paclitaxel; paclitaxel analogues; axel derivatives; palauamine; palmitoylrhizoxin; pamidronic acid; panaxytriol; panomifene; parabactin; pazelliptine; pegaspargase; peldesine; pentosan polysulfate sodium; pentostatin; pentrozole; perflubron; famide; perillyl alcohol; phenazinomycin; phenylacetate; phosphatase inhibitors; picibanil; pilocarpine hydrochloride; pirarubicin; piritrexim; placetin A; placetin B; plasminogen activator inhibitor; um complex; um compounds; platinum- triamine complex; porfimer sodium; porfiromycin; sone; propyl bis-acridone; prostaglandin J2; proteasome inhibitors; protein A-based immune modulator; n kinase C inhibitor; n kinase C inhibitors; microalgal; protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors; puIine nucleoside phosphorylase inhibitors; purpurins; loacridine; pyridoxylated hemoglobin polyoxyethylene conjugate; raf antagonists; raltitrexed; ramosetron; ras farnesyl protein transferase tors; ras inhibitors; ras-GAP inhibitor; retelliptine demethylated; rhenium Re 186 etidronate; rhizoxin; ribozymes; RII retinamide; rohitukine; romurtide; roquinimex; rubiginone Bl; ruboxyl; safingol; pin; SarCNU; sarcophytol A; sargramostim; Sdi l mimetics; semustine; senescence derived inhibitor 1; sense oligonucleotides; signal transduction tors; sizofiran; sobuzoxane; sodium borocaptate; sodium phenylacetate; solverol; somatomedin binding protein; sonermin; sparfosic acid; spicamycin D; spiromustine; pentin; spongistatin l; squalamine; stipiamide; lysin inhibitors; sulfinosine; superactive vasoactive intestinal peptide antagonist; suradista; suramin; swainsonine; tallimustine; tamoxifen methiodide; tauromustine; tazarotene; tecogalan sodium; tegafur; tellurapyrylium; telomerase inhibitors; temoporfin; teniposide; tetrachlorodecaoxide; tetrazomine; thaliblastine; thiocoraline; opoietin; opoietin mimetic; thymalfasin; thymopoietin receptor agonist; thymotrinan; thyroid stimulating hormone; tin ethyl rpurin; tirapazamine; titanocene bichloride; topsentin; toremifene; translation inhibitors; tretinoin; triacetyluridine; triciribine; rexate; triptorelin; tropisetron; turosteride; tyrosine kinase inhibitors; tyrphostins; UBC tors; ubenimex; urogenital sinus-derived growth inhibitory factor; urokinase receptor antagonists; vapreotide; in B; velaresol; veramine; verdins; verteporfin; lbine; vinxaltine; vitaxin; le; zanoterone; zeniplatin; zilascorb; and zinostatin stimalamer.

Specific second active agents particularly useful in the methods or compositions include; but are not limited to; rituximab; oblimersen (Genasense®); remicade; docetaxel; celecoxib; melphalan, dexamethasone (Decadron®); steroids; gemcitabine; cisplatinum; temozolomide, etoposide, cyclophosphamide, r, carboplatin, procarbazine, gliadel, tamoxifen, topotecan, methotrexate, Arisa®, taxol, taxotere, fluorouracil, leucovorin, irinotecan, xeloda, CPT-l 1, interferon alpha, pegylated interferon alpha (e.g., PEG INTRON—A), capecitabine, cisplatin, thiotepa, fludarabine, carboplatin, liposomal daunorubicin, Ara-C, xol, pacilitaxel, vinblastine, IL-2, GM CSF, dacarbazine, vinorelbine, zoledronic acid, palmitronate, biaXin, busulphan, prednisone, bisphosphonate, arsenic trioxide, vincri stine, doxorubicin (Doxil®), paclitaxel, ganciclovir, adriamycin, estramustine sodium phosphate (Emcyt®), sulindac, and ide.

In certain embodiments of the methods provided herein, use of a second active agent in combination with a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, may be modified or delayed during or shortly following administration of a nd ed herein, or a tive thereof, as deemed appropriate by the practitioner of skill in the art. In n embodiments, subjects being administered a nd provided herein, or a derivative thereof, alone or in combination with other therapies may e supportive care including etics, myeloid growth factors, and transfusions of platelets, when appropriate. In some ments, subjects being administered a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, may be administered a growth factor as a second active agent ing to the judgment of the practitioner of skill in the art. In some embodiments, provided is administration of a compound provided herein, or a derivative f, in combination with erythropoietin or darbepoetin (Aranesp).

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered with gemcitabine and cisplatinum to patients with locally ed or metastatic transitional cell bladder cancer.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided , or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with a second active ingredient as follows: temozolomide to pediatric patients with relapsed or progressive brain tumors or recurrent neuroblastoma, celecoxib, etoposide and cyclophosphamide for relapsed or progressive CNS cancer, temodar to ts with recurrent or progressive meningioma, malignant meningioma, hemangiopericytoma, multiple brain ases, relapased brain tumors, or newly diagnosed glioblastoma orms, ecan to patients with recurrent glioblastoma; carboplatin to pediatric patients with brain stem glioma, procarbazine to pediatric patients with progressive malignant gliomas, cyclophosphamide to patients with poor prognosis malignant brain tumors, newly diagnosed or recurrent glioblastoma multiforms; l® for high grade recurrent malignant gliomas; temozolomide and tamoxifen for stic astrocytoma, or topotecan for gliomas, glioblastoma, anaplastic astrocytoma or anaplastic oligodendroglioma.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered with methotrexate, cyclophosphamide, taxane, abraxane, lapatinib, herceptin, aromatase inhibitors, selective estrogen modulators, estrogen receptor antagonists, and/or PLX3397 (Plexxikon) to patients with metastatic breast cancer.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, is administered with temozolomide to patients with ndocrine tumors.

In certain embodiments, a nd provided , or a derivative thereof, is stered with gemcitabine to patients with recurrent or metastatic head or neck cancer.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered with gemcitabine to patients with pancreatic cancer.

] In certain embodiments, a nd provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with colon cancer in combination with ARISA®, avastatin, taxol, and/or taxotere.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered with capecitabine and/or PLX4032 (Plexxikon) to patients with refractory colorectal cancer or ts who fail first line therapy or have poor performance in colon or rectal adenocarcinoma. 7] In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with fluorouracil, leucovorin, and irinotecan to patients with Dukes C & D colorectal cancer or to patients who have been previously treated for metastatic colorectal cancer. 8] In n embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is stered to patients with tory colorectal cancer in combination with capecitabine, xeloda, and/or CPT-l 1.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered with capecitabine and irinotecan to patients with tory colorectal cancer or to ts with unresectable or metastatic colorectal carcinoma. 2016/068032 In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered alone or in combination with interferon alpha or tabine to patients with unresectable or metastatic hepatocellular carcinoma; or with cisplatin and thiotepa to patients with primary or atic liver cancer.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is stered in combination with pegylated interferon alpha to patients with Kaposi’s a. 2] In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with fludarabine, carboplatin, and/or topotecan to patients with refractory or relapsed or high—risk acute myeloid leukemia.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with liposomal daunorubicin, topotecan and/or cytarabine to patients with unfavorable karotype acute myeloblastic leukemia.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with gemcitabine, abraxane, erlotinib, geftinib, and/or ecan to patients with non-small cell lung cancer.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative f, is stered in combination with carboplatin and irinotecan to patients with non-small cell lung cancer.

In certain embodiments, a nd provided , or a derivative f, is administered with doxetaxol to patients with non-small cell lung cancer who have been previously treated with carbo/VP l6 and radiotherapy.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided , or a tive thereof, is administered in combination with carboplatin and/or taxotere, or in combination with carboplatin, pacilitaxel and/or thoracic radiotherapy to patients with non-small cell lung . 8] In certain embodiments, a compound provided , or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with taxotere to patients with stage IIIB or IV non-small cell lung cancer.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with oblimersen (Genasense®) to patients with small cell lung cancer.

WO 12777 In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with ABT-737 (Abbott Laboratories) and/or obatoclaX (GX15—070) to ts with lymphoma and other blood cancers.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided , or a derivative thereof, is administered alone or in combination with a second active ingredient such as vinblastine or fludarabine to patients with various types of lymphoma, including, but not limited to, n’s lymphoma, non-Hodgkin’s ma, cutaneous T-Cell lymphoma, cutaneous B-Cell lymphoma, diffuse large B-Cell lymphoma or relapsed or refractory low grade follicular lymphoma.

In n embodiments, a compound ed herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with taxotere, IL-2, IFN, GM-CSF, PLX4032 (Plexxikon) and/or dacarbazine to patients with various types or stages of melanoma.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative f, is administered alone or in combination with vinorelbine to patients with malignant mesothelioma, or stage IIIB non-small cell lung cancer with pleural implants or malignant pleural effusion mesothelioma syndrome.

In n embodiments, a compound provided , or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of multiple myeloma in combination with dexamethasone, zoledronic acid, palmitronate, GM-CSF, biaxin, vinblastine, melphalan, busulphan, cyclophosphamide, IFN, palmidronate, prednisone, bisphosphonate, celecoxib, arsenic trioxide, PEG INTRON—A, stine, or a combination thereof.

In certain embodiments, a compound ed herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with relapsed or tory multiple a in combination with doxorubicin (Doxil®), vincristine and/or dexamethasone (Decadron®).

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of ovarian cancer such as peritoneal carcinoma, papillary serous carcinoma, refractory ovarian cancer or recurrent ovarian cancer, in combination with taxol, carboplatin, doxorubicin, gemcitabine, cisplatin, xeloda, paclitaxel, thasone, or a combination thereof.

In certain ments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of prostate cancer, in combination with xeloda, FU/LV, gemcitabine, ecan plus gemcitabine, hosphamide, vincristine, dexamethasone, GM-CSF, celecoxib, taxotere, ganciclovir, paclitaxel, adriamycin, docetaxel, estramustine, Emcyt, denderon or a combination thereof.

In n embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of renal cell cancer, in combination with capecitabine, IFN, tamoxifen, IL-2, GM-CSF, Celebrex®, or a combination f.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided , or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of gynecologic, uterus or soft tissue sarcoma cancer in combination with IFN, a COX-2 inhibitor such as Celebrex®, and/or ac.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of solid tumors in combination with celebrex, etoposide, cyclophosphamide, docetaxel, apecitabine, IFN, tamoxifen, IL-2, GM-CSF, or a combination thereof.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with scleroderma or cutaneous vasculitis in combination with celebrex, etoposide, cyclophosphamide, docetaxel, abine, IFN, tamoxifen, IL-2, GM-CSF, or a combination thereof.

Also encompassed herein is a method of sing the dosage of an anti-cancer drug or agent that can be safely and effectively administered to a patient, which comprises administering to the patient (e. g., a human) a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof.

Patients that can benefit by this method are those likely to suffer from an adverse effect associated with anti-cancer drugs for treating a specific cancer of the skin, subcutaneous tissue, lymph nodes, brain, lung, liver, bone, intestine, colon, heart, pancreas, adrenal, , prostate, breast, colorectal, or combinations thereof. The administration of a compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, alleviates or s adverse effects which are of such severity that it would otherwise limit the amount of anti-cancer drug.

In one embodiment, a nd provided , or a derivative thereof, is administered orally and daily in an amount ranging from about 0.1 to about 150 mg, from about 1 to about 50 mg, or from about 2 to about 25 mg, prior to, during, or after the occurrence of the adverse effect associated with the stration of an anti-cancer drug to a patient. In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered in combination with specific agents such as heparin, aspirin, coumadin, or G CSF to avoid adverse effects that are associated with anti-cancer drugs such as but not limited to neutropenia or ocytopenia.

In one embodiment, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with diseases and disorders associated with or characterized by, undesired angiogenesis in combination with additional active ingredients, including, but not limited to, anti- cancer drugs, anti-inflammatories, stamines, antibiotics, and steroids.

In another embodiment, encompassed herein is a method of treating, ting and/or managing cancer, which comprises administering the nd ed herein, or a derivative thereof, in ction with (e. g. before, during, or after) conventional therapy including, but not limited to, surgery, immunotherapy, biological therapy, radiation therapy, or other non-drug based therapy tly used to treat, prevent or manage cancer. The ed use of the nd provided herein, or a derivative thereof, and conventional therapy may provide a unique treatment regimen that is unexpectedly effective in certain patients. t being limited by theory, it is believed that the compound ed herein, or a derivative thereof, may provide additive or synergistic effects when given concurrently with conventional y.

As discussed elsewhere herein, encompassed herein is a method of reducing, treating and/or preventing adverse or undesired effects associated with conventional therapy including, but not limited to, surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, ical therapy and immunotherapy. A compound provided herein, or a derivative f, and other active ingredient can be administered to a patient prior to, during, or after the occurrence of the adverse effect associated with conventional therapy.

In one embodiment, the compound provided herein, or a tive thereof, can be stered in an amount ranging from about 0.1 to about 150 mg, from about 1 to about 25 mg, or from about 2 to about 10 mg orally and daily alone, or in combination with a second active agent disclosed herein (see, e.g, section 5.4), prior to, during, or after the use of conventional therapy.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, and doxetaxol are administered to patients with non-small cell lung cancer who were usly treated with carbo/VP 16 and radiotherapy.

In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with s types or stages of cancer, in combination with an immune oncology drug or a combination of immune oncology drugs. In one embodiment, a compound provided herein, or a derivative thereof, is administered to patients with various types or stages of cancer, in combination with Opdivo, da, Yervoy or a combination thereof. 7.2 Inflammation As discussed herein, activation of MAPKs is a ent of the inflammatory response. Thus, the compounds provided herein, which are MAPK inhibitors, are useful in the ent of inflammatory diseases.

In one embodiment, the inflammatory disease is inflammation-associated cancer development. As disclosed here, the compounds provided herein are useful in treatment of .

It is well recognized that the immune inflammatory state serves as a key mediator of the middle stages of tumor development. It is also well known that chronic inflammation can predispose an individual to cancer. Chronic inflammation is caused by a variety of factors, including bacterial, viral, and parasitic infections. The longer the ation persists, the higher the risk of associated carcinogenesis. Anti-inflammatory cancer therapy prevents premalignant cells from turning fully cancerous or impede existing tumors from spreading to distant sites in the body. Thus, in one embodiment, the compounds provided herein are useful in treating inflammatory cancers. Such cancers, and the c inflammatory ions that predispose susceptible cells to neoplastic transformation, include gastric adenocarcinoma (gastritis), mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue (MALT) lymphoma (gastritis), r, liver and rectal carcinomas (schistosomiasis), cholangiocarcinoma and colon carcinoma (cholangitis), gall bladder cncer (chronic cholecystitis), ovarian and cervical carcinoma (pelvic inflammatory e, chronic itis), skin carcinoma (osteomyelitis), colorectal carcinoma (inflammatory bowel disease), geal carcinoma (reflux esophagitis, Barrett’s esophagus), bladder cancer (bladder inflammation (cystitis)), mesothelioma and lung carcinoma (asbestosis, silicosis), oral squamous cell carcinoma (gingivitis, lichen planus), atic carcinoma eatitis, protease on), vulvar squamous cell carcinoma (lichen sclerosis), salivary gland carcinoma (slaladenitis), lung carcinoma (bronchitis) and MALT lymphoma (Sjogren syndrome, Hashimoto’s thyroiditis). Shacter, et al., 2002, Oncology, 16(2), 217-26.

In certain embodiments, the nds provided herein are useful in treating atory diseases in the airways, such as nonspecific bronchial hyper-reactivity, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis, and acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS).

In certain embodiments, the compounds ed herein are useful in treating asthma and idiopathic lung fibrosis or idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF), ary fibrosis, and interstitial lung disease. As known to one of skill in the art, the differentiation of asts into cell types called oblasts occurs during wound healing, when the cells contribute to the deposition of extracellular matrix (ECM) in the transient process of wound repair. In chronic inflammatory diseases such as asthma, pathological tissue ling often occurs, and is mediated by the functions of increased numbers of myofibroblasts in the diseased tissue, see Hinz, B. et al.

Am J Pathol. 2007 ; 170: 1807—1816. In certain embodiments, the compounds ed herein t or reduce TGF-B-induced myofibroblast differentiation, as measured by the expression of alpha smooth muscle actin ), a hallmark of oblast differentiation (Serini, G. and Gabbiani, G. 1999, Exp. Cell Res. 250: 273-283).

In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in treating psoriasis, chronic plaque psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, acanthosis, atopic dermatitis, various forms of eczema, contact itis des allergic dermatitis), systemic sclerosis (scleroderma), wound healing, and drug eruption.

In one embodiment, the disease is inflammation, arthritis, rheumatoid tis, spondylarthropathies, gouty arthritis, osteoarthritis, juvenile arthritis, and other arthritic conditions, systemic lupus erthematosus (SLE), skin-related conditions, eczema, SjOgren's syndrome, burns, dermatitis, nflammation, allergy pain, autoimmune myositis, neuropathic pain, fever, ary ers, lung inflammation, adult respiratory distress syndrome, pulmonary sarcoisosis, asthma, silicosis, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), cardiovascular disease, arteriosclerosis, myocardial tion (including post-myocardial infarction indications), thrombosis, congestive heart e, cardiac reperfusion injury, as well as complications ated with hypertension and/or heart failure such as vascular organ damage, restenosis, cardiomyopathy, stroke including ischemic and hemorrhagic stroke, reperfusion injury, renal reperfusion injury, ischemia including stroke and brain ischemia, and ischemia resulting from cardiac/coronary bypass, neurodegenerative disorders, liver disease and nephritis, gastrointestinal conditions, inflammatory bowel disease, s disease, gastritis, irritable bowel syndrome, ulcerative colitis, ulcerative diseases, gastric ulcers, viral and bacterial infections, sepsis, septic shock, gram negative sepsis, a, meningitis, HIV infection, opportunistic infections, cachexia secondary to infection or malignancy, cachexia secondary to 2016/068032 ed immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS), AIDS, ARC (AIDS related complex), nia, herpes virus, myalgias due to infection, influenza, mune disease, graft vs. host reaction and allograft rejections, treatment of bone resorption diseases, osteoporosis, multiple sclerosis, acute gout, pneumonitis, myocarditis, pericarditis, myositis, eczema, alopecia, vitiligo, bullous skin diseases, atherosclerosis, depression, retinitis, uveitis, scleritis, hepatitis, pancreatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, sclerosing gitis, Addison's disease, hypophysitis, thyroiditis, type I diabetes, giant cell arteritis, nephritis including lupus nephritis, vasculitis with organ involvement such as glomerulonephritis, vasculitis ing giant cell arteritis, Wegener's granulomatosis, Polyarteritis nodosa, 's disease, ki disease, Takayasu's Arteritis, vasculitis with organ involvement, acute rejection of transplanted organs. endotoxaemia, systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS), multi-organ dysfunction syndrome, toxic shock syndrome, acute lung injury, ARDS (adult respiratory distress syndrome), acute renal e, ant hepatitis, burns, acute pancreatitis, postsurgical syndromes, sarcoidosis, Herxheimer reactions, encephalitis, myelitis, SIRS associated with viral infections such as influenza, herpes zoster, herpes simplex, coronavirus or dry eye syndrome (or keratoconjunctivitis sicca (KCS)).

In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in treating neuropathic and nociceptive pain, chronic or acute, such as, without limitation, allodynia, inflammatory pain, inflammatory lgesia, post herpetic neuralgia, neuropathies, neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, HIV-related neuropathy, nerve injury, rheumatoid arthritic pain, osteoarthritic pain, burns, back pain, ocular pain, visceral pain, cancer pain, dental pain, headache, migraine, carpal tunnel syndrome, flbromyalgia, neuritis, sciatica, pelvic hypersensitivity, pelvic pain, post operative pain, post stroke pain, and ual pain. 7] In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in treating Alzheimer's disease (AD), mild ive impairment (MCI), age-associated memory impairment (AAMI), multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, vascular dementia, senile dementia, AIDS ia, Pick's e, dementia caused by cerebrovascular disorders, corticobasal degeneration, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Huntington's disease, diminished CNS function associated with traumatic brain injury.

When used for the treatment of inflammatory disease, the compounds provided herein may be administered in dosages, routes of administration and/or to achieve pK s as bed herein for the treatment of cancer. 8. EXAMPLES The following es are d to illustrate but not to limit the disclosure.

EXAMPLE 1 ol for MAPK cell-based phosphorylation assay Cell lines: derived pancreatic cancer cell lines PANC-l were purchased from ATCC and were maintained according to ATCC recommendation.

Method: Cells were plated at 7500 well density in 96-wells plate, starved ON, and the small molecules to be tested were added to the cells in the final concentration of 30 uM with 0.3% DMSO for 6 hours incubation at 37°C. Next, cells were stimulated with 1.5 ng/ml EGF for 15 min, followed by cell fixation with 4% Formaldehyde in PBS at RT for 20 min.

Phosphorylation level ofMAPK was determined by irect ELISA.

Cell-direct ELISA: For each well, cells were permeabilized with PBS-Triton 0.1%, quenched with H202 0.6% in PB S—Triton 0.1%, and probed with anti-phospho-MAPK antibodies (R&D Systems) followed by HRP-conjugated secondary antibody (Jackson Immunoresearch, West Grove, PA). Next, a on 50 uM of the fluorescent substrate AmpliFlu Red (Sigma) was added and incubated at RT for 20 min. At the end of the incubation time, fluorescence was measured at 595 nm on a microplate reader (AF2200, Eppendorf, Inc., Hamburg, Germany).

Table 2 shows inhibition data for selected compounds tested in the cellular assay described above.

Table 2: % Inhibition ofMAPK hos ho lation 30 M in the PANC-l ancreatic cancer cell line W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 A = 1-25% inhibition, B = 25-50% inhibition, C = 51-75% inhibition, D = 76-100% inhibition EXAMPLE 2 Protocol for cell eration assay Cell lines: Tumor-derived pancreatic cancer cell lines MIA-PACAZ were purchased from ATCC and grown in complete DMEM—High Glucose medium supplemented with llin (100 U/mL), streptomycin (100 ug/mL), and 10% heat-inactivated FBS at 37°C in a humidified incubator with 5% C02.

Method: Cells are plated at 1000 cells/well density in 96-wells plate, starved ON, and the next day tested small molecules are added to the cells in the final tration of 30 uM with 0.3% DMSO 3 hours prior to 10% FBS addition. After serum addition cells are incubated for 6 days at 37°C in a fied incubator with 5% C02.

Assay: At the end of the incubation period, cell cultures are tested using the CellTiter 96® AQueous One Solution Cell Proliferation Assay kit (Promega Corporation, Madison, WI) according to the manufacturer specifications. Briefly, assay is performed by adding 20 ul of the CellTiter 96 Aqueous One Solution Reagent directly to culture wells, followed by for 1—4 hours incubation at 37°C in a humidified incubator with 5% C02, At the end of tion time, ance at 492nm is recorded with the 96-well plate reader Eppendorf AF2200, and degree of small molecule—dependent proliferation inhibition is calculated from raw data assuming No Serum cells value as 100%.

W0 2017;112777 Table 3 shows inhibition data for selected compounds tested in the cellular assay described above.

Table 3: % tion of cell roliferation 30 M in MIA-PACA2 ancreatic cancer cell lines MIA- Compound PACA2 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 W0 12777 WO 12777 WO 12777 A = 1-25% inhibition, B = 25-50% inhibition, C = 51-75% inhibition, D = 76-100% inhibition EXAMPLE 3 Protocol for mouse TNF 211 ha and IL6 uantification assa Cell lines: Abelson murine leukemia virus ormed macrophage cell line RAW 264.7 was purchased from ATCC and grown in te DMEM-High Glucose medium supplemented with penicillin (100 U/mL), streptomycin (100 ug/mL), and 10% heat—inactivated FBS at 37°C in a humidified incubator with 5% C02.

Method: Cells were plated at 40000 cells/well density in a 96-wells plate. After a 3- hour incubation, macrophages were starved with DMEM plus 0.5% FBS o/n. The next day the small molecules to be tested were added to the cells in the final concentration of 30 [1M (with 0.3% DMSO) 3 hours prior to LPS stimulation (100 ng/ml). After LPS stimula-tion cells were incubated at 37°C for 16h. At the end of the incubation period, culture media were collected and production of LPS-induced TNFoc and IL6 cytokine was measured using ELISA detection kits, Sandwich ELISA: The ELISA Immunoassays kine Mouse TNF-alpha (catalog number ) and IL6 (catalog number M6000B) were purchased from R&D Systems Inc., Minneapolis, MN. These 4.5 hours solid phase ELISAs were used to measure mouse TNFoc or IL6 levels in macrophages culture supernatants. Assays were executed ing to the manufacturer specifications. 1] Table 4 shows inhibition data for selected compounds tested in the cellular assay described above.

Table 4: IL-6 and TNFoc % Inhibition 30 M in RAW 264.7 murine leukemia virus transformed macro ha e cell lines HN/ A WO 12777 \N N /N:N N\\/r\\1 O N’ N A A‘ / \ u u ~ N’li N\ IN>\NH A | H \ / \N/N\ mN7N‘ /N \ A \0 ”km ‘ W0 12777 O /NL\ W0 20171112777 2016/068032 HlmvN/\ 0 NHx/fl 0 wgcN/\NNHNI 0 ,VNN N\\ o / A \N\/\N M \ 0 @7 xfio N/ 'NH0H HN N/ A [WHOH HN » N/ A WO 12777 O p/\Z IZ5/ IZ IZ Z/ \ O / O \ \ / \ A S N/LNN, \ H H H H N 0 oAn/ WT / / \ HNYH ’ fl—lfll-fl A \ / o M N o _ N/ N/kNNF'i \ / A I H H N O /N O N N N \ I \ / \ N/kN \ A 0 H H 0 o I \ NH N N\ A 0 I u \S//0 H H N //\N / \ A 0 IA? \NEN/ —— WO 12777 \2\Y2Z / oJ/ /Z > \ / / 0 N \N %*' 0 CKN H H N N A o om / \ N Nl/N\ \CV%~~*\ w o H H W0 12777 u H o N’\ \ 0%1 \ / A 0 N N H H F o N’N o NI’N\ ‘ N\ N/kN \ / A 0 | H H N W0 12777 WAN} CCodLm/NCH HN\<\HI \N H H a H H —- o T/ \N/ O/ \N /J<Hxn7?“ N \\ A >=0 N/ Cu o w ~ NdLm/k” >1 / W0 2017;112777 2016/068032 CN\©)1\ A \ / A A N N H H N N’N\ \ l O )\—NH A o s \ NH N N I \ H: N >‘NH N/k A 0 H I ’N \N O HN \ \ IN A W0 2017;112777 2016/068032 H H o NI’N\ ‘ N\ H H \\OVKW w 0C0»I\ / \ ” ‘ 0 0’ H | / HN\<\ I 0 N\N/ N’N O=?=O N H / N N \ \ T o NI’N\ \ HN/N\ NXN>\© A H H N /0\©\/ O N”N\ \ O\)J\N/kN A h / H H (1 ° ’N‘ ‘ o/VOQLn/k”I h A W0 12777 \ \Y S O O i\ N N [\V / \// H W0 12777 N I/>‘NHN/ C A \ N / C A |\ N O s /\ N I/>\NH \N A A |\ N Fmiw\N N H \I A W0 2017;112777 2016/068032 /\ N | HN S IN / /\ N | HN IN / A O \ /\ N | HN IN / /\ N | HN IN / A NI / 0 |/\N\/| NH W0 12777 WO 12777 IN/ /N O OH O OH 0 fl NW” ”0 43mm A N \ 0 \ N / |N \ N s N / / A 0 HN\|\ W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 F F N%O\ W0 12777 WO 12777 \ OCH C A \ N N I VO/ 3 /N 0A/0 Nfij\ \ N N B OCH3 \ A 0 \ N N I Q oA/N\s \ N N A / N N o \ \ N N /N 0% B WO 12777 \ N N SOZCH3 \ N N A / N N o / \NH \ N N C 0 / N 802CH3 WO 12777 \ N N 0 /N “0 \ N N A /N Ozs\© I B \ N N /N A o o \ N N \ N N A A / N N o \ I A \ N N / /N \ N W0 12777 W0 2017;112777 2016/068032 H2N)\NW / / A N >LOCHgCHg 0 Q” \\ 3 JL / / O\/\0H A, 0 A / / H2N N A A N OCH3 OCH3 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 20171112777 2016/068032 NI \ / \ N/ Nofom-ug N N o \ N \ / N | \ / / |\ \ N N NI \ / / \ N /N NH N / / /N N N| \ / \ N/ O Nwocm OCH3 )L/ / H2N N W0 12777 i/ / H2N N N|\ S / / |\ N / / \ N / \> \ N / \> \ N / \> |\ N / N N/\ W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 2017;112777 2016/068032 Nl \ \ \ N S Nl \ \ \ N/ S NI \ \ \ N/ S H2N\8/\IK\/\N/CH3 HN’N N \ \ W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 W0 12777 NI \ \ \ N/ S Nl \ \ |\ N/ s Nl \ \ |\ N/ S ANJSH NI \ \ \ N/ S W0 12777 H2N o NI \ \ \ N S CH3O\)\NH N \ \ D | CH3 \ N S N \ \ A H2N N S 0 = 0% inhibition, A = 1-25% inhibition, B = 26-50% inhibition, C = 51-75% inhibition, D = 76—100% inhibition This disclosure is not to be limited in scope by the embodiments disclosed in the examples which are intended as single illustrations of individual aspects, and any methods which are functionally equivalent are within the scope of this disclosure. Indeed, various modifications in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing ption. Such modifications are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims. 3] Various references such as s, patent ations, and publications are cited herein, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.

Claims (8)

What is claimed is:

1. A compound of Formula VIbl: Formula VIbl or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlbl is 2-pyridyl; R8b1 is H; R9b1 is substituted phenyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, C(O)NR6R7, wherein the heteroaryl group is not a substituted pyrazole; and R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the en atom to which they are both attached.

2. A compound of Formula VIal: Formula VIal or pharrnaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlal is dyl; R831 is H or Ph; R9811 is carbocyclic, halo, trifluoromethyl, cyano, or C(O)NR6R7; R6 is H or alkyl; and R7 is alkyl.

3. A compound of Formula VIIIbl: R9b1 N R6b1R7b1 Formula VIIIbl or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlbl is 2-pyridyl; R8b1 is H; R9b1 is tuted aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, C(O)NR6R7; R6 and R7 are independently selected from en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6 and R7 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; R6b1 and R7b1 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, l, l, aryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, or arylcarbonyl, or R6b1 and R7b1 are combined to form a cyclic structure including the nitrogen atom to which they are both attached; wherein NR6b1R7b1 is not NHMe, NHEt, NHn-Pr, NHCH2CH20H, NHbenzyl optionally substituted on the phenyl ring, or NHphenethyl optionally substituted on the phenyl ring; and n NRéblR7bl is not morpholine when R8b1 and R9131 are both hydrogen.

4. A compound of Formula VIIIb4: N R1b4 / \ N /N R9b4 N R6b4R7b4 Formula VIIIb4 or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein Rlb4 is 2-pyridyl; R81)4 is H; R9]34 is CH2CONHR, n R is H, alkyl, aryl, arylakyl, heteroaryl, NR‘SMR7b4 is a morpholine ring; and p is 0-2.

5. A compound of Formula IXal: R831 N R1 31 R2a1 NRGa‘l R7a1 a IXal or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein R1311 is 2-pyridyl; R2811 is H or alkyl, R"31 is alkyl, RW and R7211 are independently ed from hydrogen, C(O)R, wherein R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl.

6. A compound of Formula VIf: N N R” | \Y Formula VIf or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein leis 2-pyridyl; and R2f is -C(0)R, wherein R is aryl, heteroaryl or alkyl.

7. A compound of Formula VIg: R59\ <\:‘Y/N Formula VIg or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein ng is 2-pyridyl; and ng is aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, CH2C(O)R, wherein R is NHZ, l, l)2, piperidine, OH or Oalkyl.

8. A method of treating, preventing or ameliorating one or more symptoms of cancer, sing stering to a subject a compound of Formula I: Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, wherein: R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, halo, pseudohalo, 0R3, C(O)R4, S(O)pR4 NR5C(O)R4, and NR6R7, R3 is en, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl; 45 l